US20170296870A1 - Display method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium - Google Patents
Display method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20170296870A1 US20170296870A1 US15/478,649 US201715478649A US2017296870A1 US 20170296870 A1 US20170296870 A1 US 20170296870A1 US 201715478649 A US201715478649 A US 201715478649A US 2017296870 A1 US2017296870 A1 US 2017296870A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- swing
- user
- swing analysis
- information
- angle
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09B—EDUCATIONAL OR DEMONSTRATION APPLIANCES; APPLIANCES FOR TEACHING, OR COMMUNICATING WITH, THE BLIND, DEAF OR MUTE; MODELS; PLANETARIA; GLOBES; MAPS; DIAGRAMS
- G09B19/00—Teaching not covered by other main groups of this subclass
- G09B19/003—Repetitive work cycles; Sequence of movements
- G09B19/0038—Sports
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B24/00—Electric or electronic controls for exercising apparatus of preceding groups; Controlling or monitoring of exercises, sportive games, training or athletic performances
- A63B24/0003—Analysing the course of a movement or motion sequences during an exercise or trainings sequence, e.g. swing for golf or tennis
- A63B24/0006—Computerised comparison for qualitative assessment of motion sequences or the course of a movement
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B60/00—Details or accessories of golf clubs, bats, rackets or the like
- A63B60/46—Measurement devices associated with golf clubs, bats, rackets or the like for measuring physical parameters relating to sporting activity, e.g. baseball bats with impact indicators or bracelets for measuring the golf swing
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B69/00—Training appliances or apparatus for special sports
- A63B69/36—Training appliances or apparatus for special sports for golf
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B71/00—Games or sports accessories not covered in groups A63B1/00 - A63B69/00
- A63B71/06—Indicating or scoring devices for games or players, or for other sports activities
- A63B71/0619—Displays, user interfaces and indicating devices, specially adapted for sport equipment, e.g. display mounted on treadmills
- A63B71/0622—Visual, audio or audio-visual systems for entertaining, instructing or motivating the user
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B24/00—Electric or electronic controls for exercising apparatus of preceding groups; Controlling or monitoring of exercises, sportive games, training or athletic performances
- A63B24/0003—Analysing the course of a movement or motion sequences during an exercise or trainings sequence, e.g. swing for golf or tennis
- A63B24/0006—Computerised comparison for qualitative assessment of motion sequences or the course of a movement
- A63B2024/0012—Comparing movements or motion sequences with a registered reference
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B2102/00—Application of clubs, bats, rackets or the like to the sporting activity ; particular sports involving the use of balls and clubs, bats, rackets, or the like
- A63B2102/32—Golf
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B2220/00—Measuring of physical parameters relating to sporting activity
- A63B2220/80—Special sensors, transducers or devices therefor
- A63B2220/803—Motion sensors
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B2220/00—Measuring of physical parameters relating to sporting activity
- A63B2220/80—Special sensors, transducers or devices therefor
- A63B2220/83—Special sensors, transducers or devices therefor characterised by the position of the sensor
- A63B2220/833—Sensors arranged on the exercise apparatus or sports implement
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63B—APPARATUS FOR PHYSICAL TRAINING, GYMNASTICS, SWIMMING, CLIMBING, OR FENCING; BALL GAMES; TRAINING EQUIPMENT
- A63B2220/00—Measuring of physical parameters relating to sporting activity
- A63B2220/80—Special sensors, transducers or devices therefor
- A63B2220/83—Special sensors, transducers or devices therefor characterised by the position of the sensor
- A63B2220/836—Sensors arranged on the body of the user
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
- G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
- G16H20/00—ICT specially adapted for therapies or health-improving plans, e.g. for handling prescriptions, for steering therapy or for monitoring patient compliance
- G16H20/30—ICT specially adapted for therapies or health-improving plans, e.g. for handling prescriptions, for steering therapy or for monitoring patient compliance relating to physical therapies or activities, e.g. physiotherapy, acupressure or exercising
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a display method, a swing analysis apparatus, a swing analysis system, a swing analysis program, and a recording medium.
- JP-A-2015-123206 discloses a technique in which a swing is imaged with a video camera, and analysis is performed by using captured moving images.
- JP-A-2014-64125 discloses a technique in which a swing is analyzed on the basis of multi-motion images obtained by superimposing and combining a plurality of continuously captured images of the swing.
- JP-A-2014-100341 discloses a technique in which an impact timing, that is, a ball hitting timing during a swing is detected by using a motion sensor, and then the swing is analyzed.
- JP-A-2015-123206 and JP-A-2014-64125 a size of a device capturing moving images or consecutive images (multi-motion images) is large, and thus there is a problem in that it is hard for a user to easily measure a swing.
- swing analysis can be easily performed by using a motion sensor attached to an exercise appliance (golf club), but there is a problem in that it is hard for a user to objectively recognize variations in a plurality of swings.
- An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following forms or application examples.
- a display method includes generating first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user; estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and displaying a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
- respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings are estimated on the basis of first analysis information which is generated on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the estimated respective ball arrival positions. Since such display is performed, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation.
- the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
- a predetermined target region is displayed in the coordinate system.
- the predetermined target region is displayed in the coordinate system, a user can specifically and objectively recognize to what extent there is a gap with the target with respect to a ball arrival position, or to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to the target in addition to a variation.
- the first region image includes a plurality of time-series images, and the plurality of time-series images are displayed in the coordinate system.
- the plurality of time-series images included in the first region image are displayed in the coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes. Since such display is performed, a user can recognize transition of the first analysis information related to a plurality of swings as the plurality of time-series images. Consequently, the user can objectively recognize to what extent the present ability (level) of the user related to a plurality of swings is improved in addition to a variation.
- a display aspect differs for each of the time-series images.
- the user can easily identify at first sight a transition state from the past to the present with respect to the ability (level) related to a plurality of swings.
- an area of the first region image is the magnitude corresponding to variations between the plurality of pieces of data related to the plurality of swings.
- the user can easily and objectively check variations between a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings at first sight on the basis of a size (magnitude) of the area of the first region image.
- a second region image corresponding to the first region image in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user is displayed in the coordinate system along with the first region image.
- the user since the second region image corresponding to the first region image in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user is displayed in the coordinate system, the user can perform comparison with the second region image related to swings performed by another person, and can thus perform more objective evaluation.
- the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and a proportion of the second region image occupying each of the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
- a proportion of the second region image which is included in each of the regions into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is obtained by estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings, that is, a proportion related to a ball arrival position estimated for each swing is displayed. Consequently, the user can understand a swing state of another person.
- the user can objectively check biasing or the like in ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings performed by the user while performing comparison with swings performed by another person.
- the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and a proportion of the first region image occupying each of the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
- a proportion of the first region image which is included in each of the regions into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is obtained by estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings, that is, a proportion related to a ball arrival position estimated for each swing performed by the user is displayed.
- the user can objectively check biasing or the like in ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings.
- a ball flight trajectory from a ball shooting position to an arrival position is displayed in the coordinate system.
- the user can check a flight trajectory (movement trajectory) of a ball hit by the user through image display, and can thus easily understand the flight trajectory.
- the first analysis information includes information related to at least one of impact, a V zone, efficiency, rotation, a head speed, hands-up, and a down blow.
- the user can obtain information related to at least one of impact, a V zone, efficiency, rotation, a head speed, hands-up, and a down blow as analysis data of an important index indicating ability (level) regarding a plurality of swings and detailed data. Consequently, the user can more efficiently understand swing ability.
- diagnosis information is displayed on the basis of the first region image.
- diagnosis information based on the first region image is displayed, the user can easily understand a swing state, and can thus take appropriate measures to improve a swing.
- a practice method is displayed on the basis of the diagnosis information.
- a practice method based on diagnosis information is displayed, and thus the user can perform an efficient practice.
- a swing analysis apparatus includes an analysis section that generates first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user; a processing section that estimates respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and a display section that displays a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
- the processing section estimates respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings on the basis of first analysis information which is generated by the analysis section on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective estimated ball arrival positions on the display section. Since such display is performed, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation.
- the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
- a predetermined target region is displayed in the coordinate system.
- the predetermined target region is displayed in the coordinate system, a user can objectively recognize to what extent there is a gap with the target with respect to a ball arrival position, or to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to the target in addition to a variation.
- the first region image includes a plurality of time-series images, and the plurality of time-series images are displayed in the coordinate system.
- the plurality of time-series images included in the first region image are displayed together in the coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes. Since such display is performed, a user can recognize transition of the first analysis information related to a plurality of swings as the plurality of time-series images. Consequently, the user can specifically and objectively recognize to what extent the present ability (level) of the user related to a plurality of swings is improved in addition to a variation.
- a display aspect differs for each of the time-series images.
- the user can easily identify at first sight a transition state from the past to the present with respect to the ability (level) related to a plurality of swings.
- an area of the first region image is the magnitude corresponding to variations between the plurality of pieces of data related to the plurality of swings.
- the user can easily and objectively check variations between a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings at first sight.
- a second region image corresponding to the first region image in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user is displayed in the coordinate system along with the first region image.
- the user since the second region image corresponding to the first region image in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user is displayed in the coordinate system, the user can perform comparison with the second region image related to swings performed by another person, and can thus perform more objective evaluation.
- the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and a proportion of the second region image occupying each of the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
- a proportion of the second region image which is included in each of the regions into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is obtained by estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings performed by another user, that is, a proportion related to a ball arrival position estimated for each swing is displayed. Consequently, the user can understand a swing state of another person.
- the user can objectively check biasing or the like in ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings performed by the user while performing comparison with swings performed by another person.
- the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and a proportion of the first region image occupying each of the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
- a proportion of the first region image which is included in each of the regions into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is obtained by estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings, that is, a proportion related to a ball arrival position estimated for each swing performed by the user is displayed.
- the user can objectively check biasing or the like in ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings.
- a ball flight trajectory from a ball shooting position to an arrival position is displayed in the coordinate system.
- the user can check a flight trajectory (movement trajectory) of a ball hit by the user through image display, and can thus easily understand the flight trajectory.
- the first analysis information includes information related to at least one of impact, a V zone, efficiency, rotation, a head speed, hands-up, and a down blow.
- the user can obtain information related to at least one of impact, a V zone, efficiency, rotation, a head speed, hands-up, and a down blow as analysis data of an important index indicating ability (level) regarding a plurality of swings and detailed data. Consequently, the user can more efficiently understand swing ability.
- diagnosis information is displayed on the basis of the first region image.
- diagnosis information based on the first region image is displayed, the user can easily understand a swing state, and can thus take appropriate measures to improve a swing.
- a practice method is displayed on the basis of the diagnosis information.
- a practice method based on diagnosis information is displayed, and thus the user can perform an efficient practice.
- a swing analysis system includes the swing analysis apparatus according to any one of the application examples; and an inertial sensor.
- the processing section estimates respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings on the basis of first analysis information which is generated by the analysis section on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the estimated respective ball arrival positions on the display section. Since such display is performed on the display section, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation. Therefore, by using the swing analysis system, the user can perform highly accurate practice.
- a swing analysis program causes a computer to execute generating first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user; estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and displaying a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
- respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings are estimated on the basis of first analysis information which is generated on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the estimated respective ball arrival positions. Since such display is performed, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation.
- the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
- a recording medium stores a program causing a computer to execute generating first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user; estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and displaying a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
- respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings are estimated on the basis of first analysis information which is generated on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the estimated respective ball arrival positions. Since such display is performed, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation.
- the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motion analysis system of the present embodiment.
- FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a sensor unit and a swing analysis apparatus.
- FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating examples of a position at which and a direction in which the sensor unit is attached.
- FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating procedures of actions performed by a user until the user hits a ball.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of an input screen of physical information and golf club information.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a swing action.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a selection screen of swing analysis data.
- FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of an editing screen of input data which is a swing diagnosis target.
- FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a swing diagnosis screen.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating configuration examples of the sensor unit and a swing analysis apparatus.
- FIG. 11 is a plan view in which a golf club and the sensor unit are viewed from a negative side of an X axis during standing still of the user.
- FIG. 12 is a graph illustrating examples of temporal changes of three-axis angular velocities.
- FIG. 13 is a graph illustrating a temporal change of a combined value of the three-axis angular velocities.
- FIG. 14 is a graph illustrating a temporal change of a derivative of the combined value.
- FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a shaft plane and a Hogan plane.
- FIG. 16 is a view in which a sectional view of the shaft plane which is cut in a YZ plane is viewed from the negative side of the X axis.
- FIG. 17 is a view in which a sectional view of the Hogan plane which is cut in the YZ plane is viewed from the negative side of the X axis.
- FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a face angle and a club path (incidence angle).
- FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporal change of a shaft axis rotation angle from swing starting (backswing starting) to impact.
- FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporal change of a speed of a grip in a downswing.
- FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining definition of an attack angle (first angle) of a ball hitting portion at impact.
- FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a swing analysis process (swing analysis method).
- FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a swing diagnosis apparatus.
- FIG. 24A is a diagram illustrating relationships among the shaft plane and the Hogan plane, and a plurality of regions.
- FIG. 24B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the shaft plane, the Hogan plane, and a user's attitude.
- FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a V zone score table.
- FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rotation score table.
- FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of an impact score table.
- FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of a down blow score table.
- FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of an upper blow score table.
- FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a swing efficiency score table.
- FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a carry score table.
- FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a process performed by the swing analysis apparatus in relation to a swing diagnosis process.
- FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of the swing diagnosis process (swing diagnosis method).
- FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a process of calculating scores and a total score of a plurality of items.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball arrival position as a display example 1.
- FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball a ball arrival position and a target region as a display example 2.
- FIG. 37 is a histogram related to a “shooting direction” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position.
- FIG. 38 is a histogram related to “curving” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position.
- FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining display examples illustrating a swing trajectory of a club head of a right-handed subject and a swing trajectory of a club head of a left-handed subject.
- FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a display example in which one of swing trajectories having mirror image shapes due to a difference between dominant hands of subjects is inverted to overlap the other which is not inverted.
- FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a ball arrival position and a ball flight line (ball flight trajectory) as a display example 3.
- FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating Modification Example 1 related to another display method of an analysis result.
- FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating Modification Example 2 related to another display method of an analysis result.
- FIG. 44A is a diagram for explaining a V zone (a first virtual plane and a second virtual plane).
- FIG. 44B is a diagram illustrating a modification example of the first virtual plane and the second virtual plane.
- FIG. 44C is a diagram illustrating another modification example of the first virtual plane and the second virtual plane.
- FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motion analysis system related to a modification example.
- FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of a sensor unit and a swing analysis apparatus related to a modification example.
- FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the motion analysis apparatus is configured by using a head mounted display.
- FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the motion analysis apparatus is configured by using a wrist type terminal.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motion analysis system of the present embodiment.
- a motion analysis system (swing analysis system) 1 of the present embodiment is configured to include a sensor unit (an example of an inertial sensor) 10 , and a swing analysis apparatus (an example of a motion analysis apparatus) 20 .
- Communication between the sensor unit 10 and the swing analysis apparatus 20 may be wireless communication, and may be wired communication.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motion analysis system of the present embodiment.
- a motion analysis system (swing analysis system) 1 of the present embodiment is configured to include a sensor unit (an example of an inertial sensor) 10 , and a swing analysis apparatus (an example of a motion analysis apparatus) 20 .
- Communication between the sensor unit 10 and the swing analysis apparatus 20 may be wireless communication, and may be wired communication.
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 is implemented by various information terminals (client terminals) including not only a personal computer 20 a , but also a portable apparatus 20 b such as a smart phone or a tablet PC, or a wearable terminal such as head mounted display (HMD) or a wrist apparatus.
- client terminals including not only a personal computer 20 a , but also a portable apparatus 20 b such as a smart phone or a tablet PC, or a wearable terminal such as head mounted display (HMD) or a wrist apparatus.
- client terminals including not only a personal computer 20 a , but also a portable apparatus 20 b such as a smart phone or a tablet PC, or a wearable terminal such as head mounted display (HMD) or a wrist apparatus.
- HMD head mounted display
- the motion analysis system (swing analysis system) 1 may be configured to include a swing diagnosis apparatus 30 separately from the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 may be included in the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 may be implemented by a server which processes a request from the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 and the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 may be connected to each other via a network 40 .
- the network 40 may be a wide area network (WAN) such as the Internet, and may be a local area network (LAN).
- WAN wide area network
- LAN local area network
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 and the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 may communicate with each other through, for example, near field communication or wired communication, without using the network 40 .
- the sensor unit 10 can measure, for example, acceleration in each axial direction of three axes orthogonal to each other and, for example, angular velocity about each of the three axes orthogonal to each other, and is attached to, for example, a golf club 3 as an exercise appliance.
- the sensor unit 10 is attached to the golf club 3 (an example of an exercise appliance) so as to match three detection axes (an x axis, a y axis, and a z axis) intersecting (ideally, orthogonal to) each other.
- the sensor unit 10 is attached to a part of a shaft so that, for example, the y axis matches a longitudinal direction of the shaft of the golf club 3 (a longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 ), and, for example, the x axis matches a target direction of a hit ball (target hitting direction).
- the sensor unit 10 is attached to a position close to a grip to which impact during ball hitting is hardly forwarded and a centrifugal force is not applied during a swing.
- the shaft is a shaft portion other than a head (ball hitting portion) 3 a of the golf club 3 and also includes the grip.
- the sensor unit 10 may be attached to a part (for example, the hand or a glove) of a user 2 , and may be attached to an accessory such as a wristwatch.
- FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating procedures of actions performed by the user 2 until the user hits the ball.
- the user 2 performs an input operation of physical information of the user 2 , information (golf club information) regarding the golf club 3 used by the user 2 , and the like via the swing analysis apparatus 20 (step S 1 ).
- FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of an input screen of physical information and golf club information, displayed on a display section 25 (refer to FIG. 10 ) of the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the user 2 inputs physical information such as a height, sex, age, and country, and inputs golf club information such as a club length (a length of the shaft), and a club number on the input screen illustrated in FIG. 5 .
- Information included in the physical information is not limited thereto, and, the physical information may include, for example, at least one of information regarding a length of the arms and a length of the legs instead of or along with the height.
- information included in the golf club information is not limited thereto, and, for example, the golf club information may not include at least one of information regarding the club length and the club number, and may include other information.
- the user 2 performs a measurement starting operation (an operation for starting measurement in the sensor unit 10 ) via the swing analysis apparatus 20 (step S 2 ).
- a measurement starting operation an operation for starting measurement in the sensor unit 10
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 After receiving a notification (for example, a notification using a voice) of giving an instruction for taking an address attitude (a basic attitude before starting a swing) from the swing analysis apparatus 20 (Y in step S 3 ), the user 2 takes an address attitude so that the axis in the longitudinal direction of the shaft of the golf club 3 is perpendicular to a target line (target hit ball direction), and stands still (step S 4 ).
- the user 2 receives a notification (for example, a notification using a voice) of permitting a swing from the swing analysis apparatus 20 (Y in step S 5 ), and then hits the golf ball 4 by performing a swing action (step S 6 ).
- a notification for example, a notification using a voice
- the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to ball hitting, and is also applicable to a practice swing, and may have a function of detecting a timing corresponding to ball hitting.
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 transmits a measurement starting command to the sensor unit 10 , and the sensor unit 10 receives the measurement starting command and starts measurement of three-axis accelerations and three-axis angular velocities.
- the sensor unit 10 measures three-axis accelerations and three-axis angular velocities in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 ms), and sequentially transmits the measured data to the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 notifies the user 2 of permission of swing starting, shown in step S 5 in FIG. 4 , and then analyzes the swing action (step S 6 in FIG. 4 ) in which the user 2 has hit the ball by using the golf club 3 on the basis of measured data from the sensor unit 10 .
- the swing action performed by the user 2 in step S 6 in FIG. 4 includes an action reaching impact (ball hitting) at which the golf ball 4 is hit from an address attitude (standing still state) through respective states of halfway back at which the shaft of the golf club 3 becomes horizontal during a backswing after starting a swing (backswing), a top at which the swing changes from the backswing to a downswing, and halfway down at which the shaft of the golf club 3 becomes horizontal during the downswing.
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 generates swing analysis data including information regarding a time point (date and time) at which the swing is performed, identification information or the sex of the user 2 , the type of golf club 3 , and an analysis result of the swing action, and transmits the swing analysis data to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 via a network 40 (refer to FIG. 1 ).
- the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the swing analysis data transmitted by the swing analysis apparatus 20 via the network 40 , and preserves the swing analysis data. Therefore, when the user 2 performs a swing action according to the procedures illustrated in FIG. 4 , the swing analysis data generated by the swing analysis apparatus 20 is preserved in the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 , and thus a swing analysis data list is built.
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 performs communication with the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 , and, for example, a selection screen of swing analysis data as illustrated in FIG. 7 is displayed on the display section 25 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the selection screen includes a time point (date and time), the type of golf club which has been used, and some index values as analysis results of a swing, with respect to each item of swing analysis data regarding the user 2 included in the swing analysis data list preserved in the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 .
- a checkbox correlated with each item of swing analysis data is located at a left end of the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 , and the user 2 checks any one of the checkboxes by operating the swing analysis apparatus 20 , and then presses an OK button located on a lower part of the selection screen. Consequently, the swing analysis apparatus 20 performs communication with the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 , and, thus, for example, an editing screen of input data which is a swing diagnosis target, as illustrated in FIG. 8 , is displayed on the display section 25 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 , with respect to the swing analysis data correlated with the checked checkbox on the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 .
- the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 includes values obtained on the basis of the selected swing analysis data as initial values with respect to the sex, the type of golf club (either of a driver or an iron), and each index of a swing. Meanings or calculation methods of the respective indexes (a region in which a position of a head 3 a at halfway back is included, a region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway down is included, a face angle, a club path (incidence angle), a shaft axis rotation angle at top, a head speed, a grip deceleration ratio, and a grip deceleration time ratio) included in the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 will be described later.
- the input data formed of the sex, the type of golf club, and the respective index values in the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 can be edited.
- the user 2 does not edit the input data or edits the input data via the operation section 23 (refer to FIG. 10 ) of the swing analysis apparatus 20 , and then presses a diagnosis starting button located on a lower part of the input data editing screen. Consequently, the swing analysis apparatus 20 transmits the input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button being pressed to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 .
- the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the input data, and performs calculation of levels (first analysis information) of a plurality of items by using the input data. For example, the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 may calculate a level of each of five items such as a “V zone”, “rotation”, “impact”, a “down blow” or an “upper blow”, and “swing efficiency (efficiency)” illustrated in the radar chart of FIG. 9 , as 5 points maximum. Meanings or calculation methods of the five items will be described later. The swing diagnosis apparatus 30 may calculate a total score of a swing by using the respective levels of the five items. The swing diagnosis apparatus 30 transmits information regarding the calculated levels and total score of the plurality of items to the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the “levels” may be represented by, for example, “1, 2, 3, .
- the levels (first analysis information) calculated by the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 may include information related to at least one of seven items as a result of adding items such as a “head speed” and “hands-up” to the five items such as the “V zone”, the “rotation”, the “impact”, the “down blow” or the “upper blow”, and the “swing efficiency (efficiency)”.
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 receives the information regarding levels and total score of the plurality of items, and displays, for example, a swing diagnosis screen as illustrated in FIG. 9 on the display section 25 .
- the swing diagnosis screen illustrated in FIG. 9 includes input data information on a left part thereof.
- the input data information is input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button being pressed in the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 , that is, data information used for diagnosis of the swing (that is, calculation of the levels and the total score of the five items) in the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 .
- the swing diagnosis screen illustrated in FIG. 9 includes a radar chart indicating scores as the levels of the five items on the central part thereof, and includes information regarding the total score on a right part thereof.
- the user 2 can understand levels and a total score of the plurality of items as diagnosis results for the input data on the left part on the basis of the swing diagnosis screen illustrated in FIG. 9 .
- the user 2 presses the diagnosis starting button without editing the input data on the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8
- the user can understand a strong point or a weak point in the user's swing on the basis of the swing diagnosis screen illustrated in FIG. 9 .
- the user 2 edits the input data and presses the diagnosis starting button on the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 , the user can understand which index is improved to what extent in order to overcome the weak point.
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 receives information regarding levels and a total score of the plurality of items related to a plurality of swings, generates first analysis information related to a ball on the basis of such a plurality of pieces of information (data), and estimates a ball arrival position corresponding to each of the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information.
- a first region image AA including a plurality of time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 is displayed in a coordinate system which will be described later in FIG. 36 and has at least two indexes as axes, on the basis of each estimated ball arrival position.
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 displays the plurality of time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 together in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes.
- each of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 is a set of ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings, and indicates variations among the ball arrival positions in each of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 .
- a single time-series image A 1 may be displayed as variations among ball arrival positions respectively corresponding to a plurality of swings in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes.
- the user 2 can specifically and objectively recognize variations among a plurality of ball arrival positions (estimated positions) corresponding to a plurality of swings, that is, the extent of the present ability (level) of the user related to a plurality of ball arrival positions (estimated positions) in a plurality of swings in addition to variations.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating configuration examples of the sensor unit 10 and the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the sensor unit 10 is configured to include an acceleration sensor 12 , an angular velocity sensor 14 , a signal processing section 16 , and a communication section 18 .
- the sensor unit 10 may have a configuration in which some of the constituent elements are deleted or changed as appropriate, or may have a configuration in which other constituent elements are added thereto.
- the acceleration sensor 12 measures respective accelerations in three axial directions which intersect (ideally, orthogonal to) each other, and outputs digital signals (acceleration data) corresponding to magnitudes and directions of the measured three-axis accelerations.
- the angular velocity sensor 14 measures respective angular velocities in three axial directions which intersect (ideally, orthogonal to) each other, and outputs digital signals (angular velocity data) corresponding to magnitudes and directions of the measured three-axis angular velocities.
- the signal processing section 16 receives the acceleration data and the angular velocity data from the acceleration sensor 12 and the angular velocity sensor 14 , respectively, adds time information thereto, stores the data in a storage portion (not illustrated), adds time information to the stored measured data (acceleration data and angular velocity data) so as to generate packet data conforming to a communication format, and outputs the packet data to the communication section 18 .
- the acceleration sensor 12 and the angular velocity sensor 14 are provided in the sensor unit 10 so that the three axes thereof match three axes (an x axis, a y axis, and a z axis) of an orthogonal coordinate system (sensor coordinate system) defined for the sensor unit 10 , but, actually, errors occur in installation angles. Therefore, the signal processing section 16 performs a process of converting the acceleration data and the angular velocity data into data in the xyz coordinate system by using a correction parameter which is calculated in advance according to the installation angle errors.
- the signal processing section 16 may perform a process of correcting the temperatures of the acceleration sensor 12 and the angular velocity sensor 14 .
- the acceleration sensor 12 and the angular velocity sensor 14 may have a temperature correction function.
- the acceleration sensor 12 and the angular velocity sensor 14 may output analog signals, and, in this case, the signal processing section 16 may A/D convert an output signal from the acceleration sensor 12 and an output signal from the angular velocity sensor 14 so as to generate measured data (acceleration data and angular velocity data), and may generate communication packet data by using the data.
- the communication section 18 performs a process of transmitting packet data received from the signal processing section 16 to the swing analysis apparatus 20 , or a process of receiving a control command from the swing analysis apparatus 20 and sending the control command to the signal processing section 16 .
- the signal processing section 16 performs various processes corresponding to control commands.
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 is configured to include a processing section 21 , a communication section 22 , an operation section 23 , a storage section 24 , a display section 25 , a sound output section 26 , and a communication section 27 .
- the swing analysis apparatus 20 may have a configuration in which some of the constituent elements are deleted or changed as appropriate, or may have a configuration in which other constituent elements are added thereto.
- the communication section 22 performs a process receiving packet data transmitted from the sensor unit 10 and sending the packet data to the processing section 21 , or a process of transmitting a control command from the processing section 21 to the sensor unit 10 .
- the operation section 23 performs a process of acquiring operation data from the user 2 and sending the operation data to the processing section 21 .
- the operation section 23 may be, for example, a touch panel type display, a button, a key, or a microphone.
- the storage section 24 is constituted of, for example, various IC memories such as a read only memory (ROM), a flash ROM, and a random access memory (RAM), or a recording medium such as a hard disk or a memory card.
- the storage section 24 stores a program for the processing section 21 performing various calculation processes or a control process, or various programs or data for realizing application functions.
- the storage section 24 stores a swing analysis program 240 which is read by the processing section 21 and executes a swing analysis process.
- the swing analysis program 240 may be stored in a nonvolatile recording medium (computer readable recording medium) in advance, or the swing analysis program 240 may be received from a server (not illustrated) or the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 by the processing section 21 via the network 40 , and may be stored in the storage section 24 .
- the storage section 24 stores golf club information 242 , physical information 244 , sensor attachment position information 246 , and swing analysis data 248 .
- the user 2 may operate the operation section 23 so as to input specification information regarding the golf club 3 (for example, at least some information such as information regarding a length of the shaft, a position of the centroid thereof, a lie angle, a face age, a loft angle, and the like) from the input screen illustrated in FIG. 5 , and the input specification information may be used as the golf club information 242 .
- specification information regarding the golf club 3 for example, at least some information such as information regarding a length of the shaft, a position of the centroid thereof, a lie angle, a face age, a loft angle, and the like
- the input specification information may be used as the golf club information 242 .
- the user 2 may sequentially input type numbers of the golf club 3 (alternatively, selects a type number from a type number list) so that specification information for each type number is stored in the storage section 24 in advance.
- specification information of an input type number may be used as the golf club information 242 .
- the user 2 may input physical information by operating the operation section 23 from the input screen illustrated in FIG. 5 , and the input physical information may be used as the physical information 244 .
- the user 2 may input an attachment position of the sensor unit 10 and a distance to the grip end of the golf club 3 by operating the operation section 23 , and the input distance information may be used as the sensor attachment position information 246 .
- the sensor unit 10 may be attached at a defined predetermined position (for example, a distance of 20 cm from the grip end), and thus information regarding the predetermined position may be stored as the sensor attachment position information 246 in advance.
- the swing analysis data 248 is data including information regarding a swing action analysis result in the processing section 21 (swing analysis portion 211 ) along with a time point (date and time) at which a swing was performed, identification information or the sex of the user 2 , and the type of golf club 3 .
- the storage section 24 is used as a work region of the processing section 21 , and temporarily stores data which is input from the operation section 23 , results of calculation executed by the processing section 21 according to various programs, and the like.
- the storage section 24 may store data which is required to be preserved for a long period of time among data items generated through processing of the processing section 21 .
- the display section 25 displays a processing result in the processing section 21 as text, a graph, a table, animation, and other images.
- the display section 25 may be, for example, a CRT, an LCD, a touch panel type display, and a head mounted display (HMD).
- a single touch panel type display may realize functions of the operation section 23 and the display section 25 .
- the display section 25 displays a plurality of time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 included in the first region image AA together in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes, for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 35 and 36 which will be described later. As illustrated in FIG. 41 , the display section 25 displays a second region image BB, related to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user 2 , corresponding to the first region image AA, together. Detailed description of display examples will be made later, and thus description thereof will be omitted.
- the display content can be switched or enlarged or reduced by touching (screen touching) the display section 25 .
- designation of the display content is performed on the operation section 23 of the display section 25 , and thus it is possible to directly perform an indication, and also to reliably and easily perform an indication.
- the sound output section 26 outputs a processing result (analysis information) in the processing section 21 so as to present the processing result as a sound such as a voice or a buzzer sound.
- the sound output section 26 may be, for example, a speaker or a buzzer.
- the communication section 27 performs data communication with a communication section 32 (refer to FIG. 23 ) of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 via the network 40 .
- the communication section 27 performs a process of receiving the swing analysis data 248 from the processing section 21 after a swing analysis process is completed, and transmitting the swing analysis data to the communication section 32 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 .
- the communication section 27 performs a process of receiving information required to display the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 from the communication section 32 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 and transmitting the information to the processing section 21 , and a process of receiving selected information on the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 from the processing section 21 and transmitting the selected information to the communication section 32 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 .
- the communication section 27 performs a process of receiving information required to display the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 from the communication section 32 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 , and transmitting the information to the processing section 21 .
- the communication section 27 performs a process of receiving input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button on the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 from the processing section 21 , and transmitting the input data to the communication section 32 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 .
- the communication section 27 performs a process of receiving information (diagnosis result information (scores or a total score of a plurality of items) based on the input data) required to display the swing diagnosis screen illustrated in FIG. 9 from the communication section 32 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 , and transmitting the information to the processing section 21 .
- the processing section 21 performs a process of transmitting a control command to the sensor unit 10 via the communication section 22 , or various computation processes on data which is received from the sensor unit 10 via the communication section 22 , according to various programs.
- the processing section 21 performs a process of reading the swing analysis data 248 from the storage section 24 , and transmitting the swing analysis data to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 via the communication section 27 , according to various programs.
- the processing section 21 may perform a process of transmitting various pieces of information to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 via the communication section 27 , and forming first region image data corresponding to the first region image AA (for example, refer to 36 ) as display data of the first analysis information on the basis of the information received from the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 , according to various programs.
- the processing section 21 performs other various control processes.
- the processing section 21 functions as a data acquisition portion 210 , a swing analysis portion 211 as an analysis portion, an image data generation portion 212 , a storage processing portion 213 , a display processing portion 214 , and a sound output processing portion 215 .
- the processing section 21 functions as a computer.
- the processing section 21 functions as the data acquisition portion 210 , the swing analysis portion 211 , the image data generation portion 212 , the storage processing portion 213 , the display processing portion 214 , and the sound output processing portion 215 , and performs a process (swing analysis process) of analyzing a swing action of the user 2 .
- the data acquisition portion 210 performs a process of receiving packet data which is received from the sensor unit 10 by the communication section 22 , acquiring time information and measured data in the sensor unit 10 from the received packet data, and sending the time information and the measured data to the storage processing portion 213 .
- the data acquisition portion 210 performs a process of receiving the information required to display the various screens (the respective screens illustrated in FIGS. 7, 8 and 9 ), received from the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 by the communication section 27 , and transmitting the information to the image data generation portion 212 .
- the storage processing portion 213 performs read/write processes of various programs or various data for the storage section 24 .
- the storage processing portion 213 performs a process of storing the time information and the measured data received from the data acquisition portion 210 in the storage section 24 in correlation with each other, or a process of storing various pieces of information calculated by the swing analysis portion 211 , the swing analysis data 248 , or the like in the storage section 24 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 as an analysis portion performs a process of analyzing a swing action (a plurality of swings) of the user 2 by using the measured data (the measured data stored in the storage section 24 ) output from the sensor unit 10 , the data from the operation section 23 , or the like, so as to generate the swing analysis data 248 as first analysis information including a time point (date and time) at which the swing was performed, identification information or the sex of the user 2 , the type of golf club 3 , and information regarding a swing action analysis result.
- the swing analysis portion 211 calculates a value of each index of the swing as at least some of the information regarding the swing action analysis result.
- the swing analysis data 248 as the first analysis information includes information regarding at least one of the impact, the V zone, the efficiency (swing efficiency), the rotation, the head speed, the hands-up, and the down blow. By obtaining such information; the user 2 can more efficiently check swing ability.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate at least one virtual plane as an index of the swing.
- at least one virtual plane includes a shaft plane SP (first virtual plane) which will be described later, and a Hogan plane HP (second virtual plane) which will be described later forming a predetermined angle with the shaft plane SP, and the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate the “shaft plane SP” and the “Hogan plane HP” as the indexes.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a position of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 at a first timing during the backswing as an index of the swing.
- the first timing is the time of halfway back, at which the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 becomes a direction along the horizontal direction during the backswing, and the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “position of the head 3 a at halfway back” which will be described later as the index.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a position of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 at a second timing during the downswing as an index of the swing.
- the second timing is the time of halfway down at which the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 becomes a direction along the horizontal direction during the downswing, and the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “position of the head 3 a at halfway down” which will be described later as the index.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on an incidence angle of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 at impact (at ball hitting), as an index of the swing. For example, the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “club path (incidence angle) ⁇ ” which will be described later as the index.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on an inclination of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 at impact (at ball hitting) as an index of the swing.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on a speed of the golf club 3 (head 3 a ) at impact (at ball hitting) as an index of the swing. For example, the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate the “head speed” which will be described later as the index.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate, as an index of the swing, an index based on a rotation angle about a rotation axis (hereinafter, referred to as about the long axis) of the shaft of the golf club 3 at a predetermined timing between the time of starting a backswing and the time of impact (at ball hitting) with the longitudinal direction of the shaft as the rotation axis.
- the rotation angle about the long axis of the golf club 3 may be an angle by which the golf club 3 is rotated about the long axis from a reference timing to a predetermined timing.
- the reference timing may be the time of starting a backswing, and may be the time of address.
- the predetermined timing may be the time (the time of a top) at which a backswing transitions to a downswing.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top” which will be described later as the index.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on a deceleration amount of the grip of the golf club 3 during the downswing as an index of the swing. For example, the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “grip deceleration ratio R V ” which will be described later as the index.
- the “grip deceleration ratio R V ” is also referred to as “natural uncock” or a “natural uncock ratio”.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on a deceleration period of the grip of the golf club 3 during the downswing as an index of the swing. For example, the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “grip deceleration time ratio R T ” which will be described later as the index.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on a deceleration timing of the grip of the golf club 3 during the downswing as an index of the swing. For example, the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a timing of natural uncock (“natural uncock timing”) of motion in which the grip side of the golf club 3 is decelerated, and the head 3 a of the golf club 3 is accelerated as the index.
- the timing of natural uncock is an index indicating a switching timing in a state in which energy accumulated in a top swing is released and is thus forwarded to the golf club 3 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate, as indexes of the swing, an index related to a position of the head 3 a at halfway back (HWB) and an index related to a position of the head 3 a at halfway down (HWD) in a region (refer to FIGS. 15 and 17 ) interposed between the shaft plane SP (first virtual plane) and the Hogan plane HP (second virtual plane) called the “V zone”.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate indexes based on a lie angle at ball hitting and a lie angle at address in the head 3 a of the golf club 3 as indexes of the swing.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate indexes based on a “face angle” and an “attack angle” in the head 3 a of the golf club 3 as indexes of the swing.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may not calculate values of some of the indexes, and may calculate values of other indexes, as appropriate.
- the image data generation portion 212 performs a process of generating image data corresponding to an image displayed on the display section 25 .
- the image data generation portion 212 generates image data corresponding to the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 , the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 , and the swing diagnosis screen illustrated in FIG. 9 , on the basis of various pieces of information received by the data acquisition portion 210 .
- the image data generation portion 212 performs, for example, a process of generating image data of a correlation diagram related to an estimation result of a ball arrival position illustrated in FIG. 41 , and a process of generating image data of another user corresponding to the first region image AA (for example, ball arrival positions) displayed on the display section 25 .
- the image data generation portion 212 generates image data (second region image data) corresponding to, for example, the second region image BB illustrated in FIG. 41 on the basis of a plurality of pieces of swing analysis data performed by another user stored in the storage section 24 .
- the display processing portion 214 performs a process of displaying various images (including text, symbols, and the like in addition to an image corresponding to the image data generated by the image data generation portion 212 ) on the display section 25 .
- the display processing portion 214 displays the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 , the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 , the swing diagnosis screen illustrated in FIG. 9 , and the like, on the display section 25 , on the basis of the image data generated by the image data generation portion 212 .
- the image data generation portion 212 may display an image, text, or the like for notifying the user 2 of permission of swing starting on the display section 25 in step S 5 in FIG. 4 .
- the display processing portion 214 may display text information such as text or symbols indicating an analysis result in the swing analysis portion 211 on the display section 25 automatically or in response to an input operation performed by the user 2 after a swing action of the user 2 is completed.
- a display section may be provided in the sensor unit 10 , and the display processing portion 214 may transmit image data to the sensor unit 10 via the communication section 22 , and various images, text, or the like may be displayed on the display section of the sensor unit 10 .
- the display processing portion 214 may display the second region images BB for another user along with the first region image AA for the user 2 displayed as images on the display section 25 , in response to an instruction from the user 2 .
- the display processing portion 214 may display, for example, comments related to a ball arrival position, or a ball shooting direction, ball curving, or the like along with the first region image AA or the second region image BB displayed as images on the display section 25 .
- the comments may be diagnosis information based on the first region image AA or information indicating a practice method based on the diagnosis information.
- the comments are preferably advice information regarding an analysis result.
- diagnosis information or a practice method based on the diagnosis information is displayed as comments, the user 2 can easily understand a swing state, and can thus take appropriate measures in relation to improvement of a swing or perform an efficient practice.
- the sound output processing portion 215 performs a process of outputting various sounds (including voices, buzzer sounds, and the like) from the sound output section 26 .
- the sound output processing portion 215 may output a sound for notifying the user 2 of permission of swing starting from the sound output section 26 in step S 5 in FIG. 4 .
- the sound output processing portion 215 may output a sound or a voice indicating an analysis result in the swing analysis portion 211 from the sound output section 26 automatically or in response to an input operation performed by the user 2 after a swing action of the user 2 is completed.
- a sound output section may be provided in the sensor unit 10 , and the sound output processing portion 215 may transmit various items of sound data or voice data to the sensor unit 10 via the communication section 22 , and may output various sounds or voices from the sound output section of the sensor unit 10 .
- a vibration mechanism may be provided in the swing analysis apparatus 20 or the sensor unit 10 , and various pieces of information may be converted into vibration pieces of information by the vibration mechanism so as to be presented to the user 2 .
- an XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system) which has a target line indicating a target hit ball direction as an X axis, an axis on a horizontal plane which is perpendicular to the X axis as a Y axis, and a vertically upward direction (a direction opposite to the gravitational direction) as a Z axis.
- the swing analysis portion 211 calculates a position and an attitude of the sensor unit 10 in a time series from the time of the address in the XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system) by using measured data (acceleration data and angular velocity data) in the sensor unit 10 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 detects respective timings of the swing starting, the top, and the impact illustrated in FIG. 6 , by using the measured data (acceleration data or angular velocity data) in the sensor unit 10 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 calculates values of the respective indexes (for example, a V zone, efficiency (swing efficiency), rotation, impact, and a down blow (or an upper blow) illustrated in the radar chart of FIG. 9 ) of the swing by using the time series data of the position and the attitude of the sensor unit 10 , and the timings of the swing starting, the top, and the impact, so as to generate the swing analysis data 248 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 determines that the user 2 stands still at an address attitude in a case where an amount of changes in acceleration data measured by the acceleration sensor 12 does not continuously exceed a threshold value for a predetermined period of time.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes an offset amount included in the measured data by using the measured data (acceleration data and angular velocity data) for the predetermined period of time.
- the swing analysis portion 211 subtracts the offset amount from the measured data so as to perform bias correction, and computes a position and an attitude of the sensor unit 10 during a swing action of the user 2 (during the action in step S 6 in FIG. 4 ) by using the bias-corrected measured data.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes a position (initial position) of the sensor unit 10 during standing still (at address) of the user 2 in the XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system) by using the acceleration data measured by the acceleration sensor 12 , the golf club information 242 , and the sensor attachment position information 246 .
- FIG. 11 is a plan view in which the golf club 3 and the sensor unit 10 during standing still (at address) of the user 2 are viewed from a negative side of an X axis.
- the origin O (0,0,0) is set at a position 61 of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 , and coordinates of a position 62 of a grip end are (0, G Y , G Z ). Since the user 2 performs the action in step S 4 in FIG. 4 , the position 62 of the grip end or the initial position of the sensor unit 10 has an X coordinate of 0, and is present on a YZ plane. As illustrated in FIG.
- Equation (1) a relationship between a y axis acceleration y(0) measured by the sensor unit 10 and an inclined angle (an angle formed between the long axis of the shaft and the horizontal plane (XY plane)) ⁇ of the shaft of the golf club 3 is expressed by Equation (1).
- the swing analysis portion 211 can calculate the inclined angle ⁇ according to Equation (1) by using any acceleration data between any time points at address (during standing still).
- the swing analysis portion 211 subtracts a distance L SG between the sensor unit 10 and the grip end included in the sensor attachment position information 246 from a length L 1 of the shaft included in the golf club information 242 , so as to obtain a distance L SH between the sensor unit 10 and the head 3 a .
- the swing analysis portion 211 sets, as the initial position of the sensor unit 10 , a position separated by the distance L SH from the position 61 (origin O) of the head 3 a in a direction (a negative direction of the y axis of the sensor unit 10 ) specified by the inclined angle ⁇ of the shaft.
- the swing analysis portion 211 integrates subsequent acceleration data so as to compute coordinates of a position from the initial position of the sensor unit 10 in a time series.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes an attitude (initial attitude) of the sensor unit 10 during standing still (at address) of the user 2 in the XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system) by using acceleration data measured by the acceleration sensor 12 . Since the user 2 performs the action in step S 4 in FIG. 4 , the x axis of the sensor unit 10 matches the X axis of the XYZ coordinate system in terms of direction at address (during standing still) of the user 2 , and the y axis of the sensor unit 10 is present on the YZ plane. Therefore, the swing analysis portion 211 can specify the initial attitude of the sensor unit 10 on the basis of the inclined angle ⁇ of the shaft of the golf club 3 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes changes in attitudes from the initial attitude of the sensor unit 10 by performing rotation calculation using angular velocity data which is subsequently measured by the angular velocity sensor 14 .
- An attitude of the sensor unit 10 may be expressed by, for example, rotation angles (a roll angle, a pitch angle, and a yaw angle) about the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis, or a quaternion.
- the signal processing section 16 of the sensor unit 10 may compute an offset amount of measured data so as to perform bias correction on the measured data, and the acceleration sensor 12 and the angular velocity sensor 14 may have a bias correction function. In this case, it is not necessary for the swing analysis portion 211 to perform bias correction on the measured data.
- the swing analysis portion 211 detects a timing (impact timing) at which the user 2 hit a ball by using measured data.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may compute a combined value of measured data (acceleration data or angular velocity data), and may detect an impact timing (time point) on the basis of the combined value.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes a combined value n 0 (t) of angular velocities at each time point t by using the angular velocity data (bias-corrected angular velocity data for each time point t). For example, if the angular velocity data items at the time point t are respectively indicated by x(t), y(t), and z(t), the swing analysis portion 211 computes the combined value n 0 (t) of the angular velocities according to the following Equation (2).
- n 0 ( t ) ⁇ square root over ( x ( t ) 2 +y ( t ) 3 +z ( t ) 2 ) ⁇ (2)
- the swing analysis portion 211 converts the combined value n 0 (t) of the angular velocities at each time point t into a combined value n(t) which is normalized (scale-conversion) within a predetermined range. For example, if the maximum value of the combined value of the angular velocities in an acquisition period of measured data is max(n 0 ), the swing analysis portion 211 converts the combined value n 0 (t) of the angular velocities into the combined value n(t) which is normalized within a range of 0 to 100 according to the following Equation (3).
- n ⁇ ( t ) 100 ⁇ n 0 ⁇ ( t ) max ⁇ ( n 0 ) ( 3 )
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes a derivative dn(t) of the normalized combined value n(t) at each time point t. For example, if a cycle for measuring three-axis angular velocity data items is indicated by ⁇ t, the swing analysis portion 211 computes the derivative (difference) dn(t) of the combined value of the angular velocities at the time point t by using the following Equation (4).
- FIG. 12 illustrates examples of three-axis angular velocity data items x(t), y(t) and z(t) obtained when the user 2 hits the golf ball 4 by performing a swing.
- a transverse axis expresses time (msec)
- a longitudinal axis expresses angular velocity (dps).
- FIG. 13 is a diagram in which the combined value n 0 (t) of the three-axis angular velocities is computed according to Equation (2) by using the three-axis angular velocity data items x(t), y(t) and z(t) in FIG. 12 , and then the combined value n(t) normalized to 0 to 100 according to Equation (3) is displayed in a graph.
- a transverse axis expresses time (msec)
- a longitudinal axis expresses a combined value of the angular velocity.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram in which the derivative dn(t) is calculated according to Equation (4) on the basis of the combined value n(t) of the three-axis angular velocities in FIG. 13 , and is displayed in a graph.
- a transverse axis expresses time (msec)
- a longitudinal axis expresses a derivative value of the combined value of the three-axis angular velocities.
- the transverse axis is displayed at 0 seconds to 5 seconds, but, in FIG. 14 , the transverse axis is displayed at 2 seconds to 2.8 seconds so that changes in the derivative value before and after impact can be understood.
- the swing analysis portion 211 specifies the earlier time point as an impact time point t impact (impact timing) (refer to FIG. 14 ). It is considered that swing speed is the maximum at the moment of impact in a typical golf swing.
- the swing analysis portion 211 can capture a timing at which a derivative value of the combined value of the angular velocities is the maximum or the minimum (that is, a timing at which the derivative value of the combined value of the angular velocities is a positive maximum value or a negative minimum value) in a series of swing actions as the impact timing.
- a timing at which a derivative value of the combined value of the angular velocities is the maximum and a timing at which a derivative value of the combined value of the angular velocities is the minimum may occur in pairs, and, of the two timings, the earlier timing may be the moment of the impact.
- the swing analysis portion 211 specifies a time point of a minimum point at which the combined value n(t) is close to 0 before the impact time point t impact , as a top time point t top (top timing) (refer to FIG. 13 ). It is considered that, in a typical golf swing, an action temporarily stops at the top after starting the swing, then a swing speed increases, and finally impact occurs. Therefore, the swing analysis portion 211 can capture a timing at which the combined value of the angular velocities is close to 0 and becomes the minimum before the impact timing, as the top timing.
- the swing analysis portion 211 sets an interval in which the combined value n(t) is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold value before and after the top time point t top , as a top interval, and detects a last time point at which the combined value n(t) is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold value before a starting time point of the top interval, as a swing starting (backswing starting) time point t start (refer to FIG. 13 ). It is hardly considered that, in a typical golf swing, a swing action is started from a standing still state, and the swing action is stopped till the top.
- the swing analysis portion 211 can capture the last timing at which the combined value of the angular velocities is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold value before the top interval as a timing of starting the swing action.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may detect a time point of the minimum point at which the combined value n(t) is close to 0 before the top time point t top as the swing starting time point t start .
- the swing analysis portion 211 may also detect each of a swing starting timing, a top timing, and an impact timing by using three-axis acceleration data in the same manner.
- the shaft plane is a first virtual plane specified by a target line (target hit ball direction) and the longitudinal direction of the shaft of the golf club 3 at address (standing still state) of the user 2 before starting a swing.
- the Hogan plane is a second virtual plane specified by a virtual line connecting the vicinity of the shoulder (the shoulder or the base of the neck) of the user 2 to the head 3 a of the golf club (or the golf ball 4 ), and the target line (target hit ball direction), at address of the user 2 .
- FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating the shaft plane and the Hogan plane.
- FIG. 15 displays the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis of the XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system).
- a virtual plane which includes a first line segment 51 as a first axis along a target hit ball direction and a second line segment 52 as a second axis along the longitudinal direction of the shaft of the golf club 3 , and has four vertices such as U 1 , U 2 , S 1 , and S 2 , as the shaft plane SP (first virtual plane).
- the position 61 of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 at address is set as the origin O (0,0,0) of the XYZ coordinate system
- the second line segment 52 is a line segment connecting the position 61 (origin O) of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 to the position 62 of the grip end.
- the first line segment 51 is a line segment having a length UL in which U 1 and U 2 on the X axis are both ends, and the origin O is a midpoint. Since the user 2 performs the action in step S 4 in FIG. 4 at address, and thus the shaft of the golf club 3 is perpendicular to the target line (X axis), the first line segment 51 is a line segment orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the shaft of the golf club 3 , that is, the second line segment 52 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 calculates coordinates of the four vertices U 1 , U 2 , S 1 , and S 2 of the shaft plane SP in the XYZ coordinate system.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes coordinates (0, G Y , G Z ) of the position 62 of the grip end of the golf club 3 by using the inclined angle ⁇ and the length L 1 of the shaft included in the golf club information 242 . As illustrated in FIG. 11 , the swing analysis portion 211 may compute G Y and G Z by using the length L 1 of the shaft and the inclined angle ⁇ according to Equations (5) and (6).
- the swing analysis portion 211 multiplies the coordinates (0, G Y , G Z ) of the position 62 of the grip end of the golf club 3 by a scale factor S so as to compute coordinates (0, S Y , S Z ) of a midpoint S 3 of the vertex S 1 and the vertex S 2 of the shaft plane SP.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes S Y and S Z according to Equations (7) and (8), respectively.
- FIG. 16 is a view in which a sectional view of the shaft plane SP in FIG. 15 which is cut in the YZ plane is viewed from the negative side of the X axis.
- a length (a width of the shaft plane SP in a direction orthogonal to the X axis) of a line segment connecting the midpoint S 3 of the vertex S and the vertex S 2 to the origin O is S times the length L 1 of the second line segment 52 .
- the scale factor S is set to a value at which a trajectory of the golf club 3 during a swing action of the user 2 enters the shaft plane SP.
- the scale factor S may be set as in Equation (9) so that the width S ⁇ L 1 of the shaft plane SP in the direction orthogonal to the X axis is twice the sum of the length L 1 of the shaft and the length L 2 of the arms.
- the length L 2 of the arms of the user 2 is associated with a height L 0 of the user 2 .
- the length L 2 of the arms is expressed by a correlation expression such as Equation (10) in a case where the user 2 is a male, and is expressed by a correlation expression such as Equation (11) in a case where the user 2 is a female, on the basis of statistical information.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may calculate the length L 2 of the arms of the user according to Equation (10) or Equation (11) by using the height L 0 and the sex of the user 2 included in the physical information 244 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes coordinates ( ⁇ UL/2,0,0) of the vertex U 1 of the shaft plane SP, coordinates (UL/2,0,0) of a vertex U 2 , coordinates ( ⁇ UL/2, S Y , S Z ) of the vertex S 1 , and coordinates (UL/2, S Y , S Z ) of the vertex 52 by using the coordinates (O, S Y , S Z ) of the midpoint S 3 and a width (the length of the first line segment 51 ) UL of the shaft plane SP in the X axis direction.
- the width UL in the X axis direction is set to a value at which a trajectory of the golf club 3 during a swing action of the user 2 enters the shaft plane SP.
- the width UL in the X axis direction may be set to be same as the width S ⁇ L 1 in the direction orthogonal to the X axis, that is, twice the sum of the length L 1 of the shaft and the length L 2 of the arms.
- the swing analysis portion 211 can calculate the coordinates of the four vertices U 1 , U 2 , S 1 , and S 2 of the shaft plane SP.
- a virtual plane which includes a first line segment 51 as a first axis and a third line segment 53 as a third axis, and has four vertices such as U 1 , U 2 , H 1 , and 1 H 2 , is used as the Hogan plane HP (second virtual plane).
- the third line segment 53 is a line segment connecting a predetermined position 63 in the vicinity of a line segment connecting both of the shoulders of the user 2 , to the position 61 of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 .
- the third line segment 53 may be a line segment connecting the predetermined position 63 to a position of the golf ball 4 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 calculates respective coordinates of the four vertices U 1 , U 2 , H 1 , and H 2 of the Hogan plane HP in the XYZ coordinate system.
- the swing analysis portion 211 estimates the predetermined position 63 by using the coordinates (0, G Y , G Z ) of the position 62 of the grip end of the golf club 3 at address (during standing still), and the length L 2 of the arms of the user 2 based on the physical information 244 , and computes coordinates (A X , A Y , A Z ) thereof.
- FIG. 17 is a view in which a sectional view of the Hogan plane HP illustrated in FIG. 15 which is cut in the YZ plane is viewed from the negative side of the X axis.
- a midpoint of the line segment connecting both of the shoulders of the user 2 is the predetermined position 63
- the predetermined position 63 is present on the YZ plane. Therefore, an X coordinate A X of the predetermined position 63 is 0.
- the swing analysis portion 211 estimates, as the predetermined position 63 , a position obtained by moving the position 62 of the grip end of the golf club 3 by the length L 2 of the arms of the user 2 in a positive direction along the Z axis.
- the swing analysis portion 211 sets a Y coordinate A Y of the predetermined position 63 to be the same as the Y coordinate G Y of the position 62 of the grip end.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes a Z coordinate A Z of the predetermined position 63 as a sum of the Z coordinate G Z of the position 62 of the grip end and the length L 2 of the arms of the user 2 as in Equation (12).
- the swing analysis portion 211 multiplies the Y coordinate A Y and the Z coordinate A Z of the predetermined position 63 by a scale factor H, so as to compute coordinates (0, H Y , H Z ) of a midpoint H 3 of the vertex H 1 and the vertex H 2 of the Hogan plane HP. In other words, the swing analysis portion 211 computes H Y and H Z according to Equation (13) and Equation (14), respectively.
- a length (a width of the Hogan plane HP in a direction orthogonal to the X axis) of a line segment connecting the midpoint H 3 of the vertex H 1 and the vertex H 2 to the origin O is H times the length L 3 of the third line segment 53 .
- the scale factor H is set to a value at which a trajectory of the golf club 3 during a swing action of the user 2 enters the Hogan plane HP.
- the Hogan plane HP may have the same shape and size as the shape and the size of the shaft plane SP.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may compute the scale factor H according to Equation (15).
- the swing analysis portion 211 may compute the length L 3 of the third line segment 53 according to Equation (13) by using the Y coordinate A Y and the Z coordinate A Z of the predetermined position 63 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes coordinates ( ⁇ UL/2, H Y , H Z ) of the vertex H 1 of the Hogan plane HP, and coordinates (UL/2, H Y , H Z ) of the vertex H 2 by using the coordinates (0, H Y , H Z ) of the midpoint H 3 and a width (the length of the first line segment 51 ) UL of the Hogan plane HP in the X axis direction.
- the two vertices U 1 and U 2 of the Hogan plane HP are the same as those of the shaft plane SP, and thus the swing analysis portion 211 does not need to compute coordinates of the vertices U 1 and U 2 of the Hogan plane HP again.
- the swing analysis portion 211 can calculate the coordinates of the four vertices U 1 , U 2 , H 1 , and H 2 of the Hogan plane HP.
- a region interposed between the shaft plane SP (first virtual plane) and the Hogan plane HP (second virtual plane) is referred to as a “V zone”, and a trajectory of a hit ball (a ball line) may be estimated to some extent on the basis of a relationship between a position of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 and the V zone during a backswing or a downswing. For example, in a case where the head 3 a of the golf club 3 is present in a space lower than the V zone at a predetermined timing during a backswing or a downswing, a hit ball is likely to fly in a hook direction.
- an angle ⁇ formed between the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP is determined depending on the length L 1 of the shaft of the golf club 3 and the length L 2 of the arms of the user 2 .
- the angle ⁇ is not a fixed value, and is determined depending on the type of golf club 3 or physical features of the user 2 , the more appropriate shaft plane SP and Hogan plane HP (V zone) are calculated as an index for diagnosing a swing of the user 2 .
- a position of the head 3 a at halfway back is a position of the head 3 a at the moment of the halfway back, right before the halfway back, or right after the halfway back
- a position of the head 3 a at halfway down is a position of the head 3 a at the moment of the halfway down, right before the halfway down, or right after the halfway down.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes a position of the head 3 a and a position of the grip end at each time point t by using the position and the attitude of the sensor unit 10 at each time point t from the swing start time point t start to the impact time point t impact .
- the swing analysis portion 211 uses, as a position of the head 3 a , a position separated by the distance L SH in the positive direction of the y axis specified by the attitude of the sensor unit 10 , from the position of the sensor unit 10 at each time point t, and computes coordinates of the position of the head 3 a .
- the distance L SH is a distance between the sensor unit 10 and the head 3 a .
- the swing analysis portion 211 uses a position separated by the distance L SG in the negative direction of the y axis specified by the attitude of the sensor unit 10 , from the position of the sensor unit 10 at each time point t, and computes coordinates of the position of the grip end.
- the distance L SG is a distance between the sensor unit 10 and the grip end.
- the swing analysis portion 211 detects a halfway back timing and a halfway down timing by using the coordinates of the position of the head 3 a and the coordinates of the position of the grip end.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes a difference ⁇ Z between a Z coordinate of the position of the head 3 a and a Z coordinate of the position of the grip end at each time point t from the swing start time point t start to the impact time point t impact .
- the swing analysis portion 211 detects a time point t HWB at which a sign of ⁇ Z is inverted between the swing start time point t start and the top time point t top , as the halfway back timing.
- the swing analysis portion 211 detects a time point t HWD at which a sign of ⁇ Z is inverted between the swing start time point t top , and the impact time point t impact , as the halfway down timing.
- the swing analysis portion 211 uses the position of the head 3 a at the time point t HWB as a position of the head 3 a at halfway back, and uses the position of the head 3 a at the time point t HWD as a position of the head 3 a at halfway down.
- a head speed is the magnitude of a speed of the head 3 a at impact (the moment of the impact, right before the impact, or right after the impact).
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes a speed of the head 3 a at the impact time point t impact on the basis of differences between the coordinates of the position of the head 3 a at the impact time point t impact and coordinates of a position of the head 3 a at the previous time point.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes the magnitude of the speed of the head 3 a as the head speed.
- the face angle is an index based on an inclination of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 at impact
- the club path is an index based on a trajectory of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 at impact.
- FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the face angle and the club path (incidence angle).
- FIG. 18 illustrates the golf club 3 (only the head 3 a is illustrated) on the XY plane viewed from a positive side of the Z axis in the XYZ coordinate system.
- the reference numeral 74 indicates a face surface (hitting surface) of the golf club 3
- the reference numeral 75 indicates a ball hitting point.
- the reference numeral 70 indicates a target line indicating a target hit ball direction
- the reference numeral 71 indicates a plane orthogonal to the target line 70 .
- the reference numeral 76 indicates a curve indicating a trajectory of the head 3 a of the golf club 3
- the reference numeral 72 is a tangential line at the ball hitting point 75 for the curve 76
- the face angle ⁇ is an angle formed between the plane 71 and the face surface 74 , that is, an angle formed between a straight line 73 orthogonal to the face surface 74 , and the target line 70
- the club path (incidence angle) w is an angle formed between the tangential line 72 (a direction in which the head 3 a in the XY plane passes through the ball hitting point 75 ) and the target line 70 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes a direction of a straight line orthogonal to the face surface 74 on the basis of the attitude of the sensor unit 10 at the impact time point t impact .
- the swing analysis portion 211 uses, a straight line obtained by setting a Z axis component of the direction of the straight line to 0, as a direction of the straight line 73 , and computes an angle (face angle) ⁇ formed between the straight line 73 and the target line 70 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 uses a direction of a speed (that is, a speed of the head 3 a in the XY plane) obtained by setting a Z axis component of a speed of the head 3 a at the impact time point t impact to 0, as a direction of the tangential line 72 , and computes an angle (club path (incidence angle)) ⁇ formed between the tangential line 72 and the target line 70 .
- the face angle ⁇ indicates an inclination of the face surface 74 with the target line 70 whose direction is fixed regardless of an incidence direction of the head 3 a to the ball hitting point 75 as a reference, and is thus also referred to as an absolute face angle.
- an angle ⁇ formed between the straight line 73 and the tangential line 72 indicates an inclination of the face surface 74 with an incidence direction of the head 3 a to the ball hitting point 75 as a reference, and is thus referred to as a relative face angle.
- the relative face angle ⁇ is an angle obtained by subtracting the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ from the (absolute) face angle ⁇ .
- the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top is an angle (relative rotation angle) by which the golf club 3 is rotated about a shaft axis from a reference timing to a top timing.
- the reference timing is, for example, the time of starting a backswing, or the time of address.
- a right-handed screw tightening direction toward the tip end on the head 3 a side of the golf club 3 is a positive direction of the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top .
- a left-handed screw tightening direction toward the tip end on the head 3 a side of the golf club 3 is a positive direction of the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top .
- FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporal change of the shaft axis rotation angle from starting of a swing (starting of a backswing) to impact.
- a transverse axis expresses time (s)
- a longitudinal axis expresses a shaft axis rotation angle (deg).
- FIG. 19 illustrates the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top with the time of starting a swing (the time of starting a backswing) as a reference timing (at which the shaft axis rotation angle is 0°).
- the y axis of the sensor unit 10 substantially matches the longitudinal direction of the shaft of the golf club 3 (the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 ). Therefore, for example, the swing analysis portion 211 time-integrates a y axis angular velocity included in angular velocity data from the swing starting (backswing starting) time point t start or the time of address to the top time point t top (at top), so as to compute the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top .
- the grip deceleration ratio is an index based on a grip deceleration amount, and is a ratio between a speed of the grip when the grip starts to be decelerated during the downswing, and a speed of the grip at impact.
- the grip deceleration time ratio is an index based on a grip deceleration period, and is a ratio between a period of time from the time at which the grip starts to be decelerated during the downswing to the time of impact, and a period of time of the downswing.
- a speed of the grip is preferably a speed of a portion held by the user 2 , but may be a speed of any portion of the grip (for example, the grip end), and may be a speed of a peripheral portion of the grip.
- FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporal change of a speed of the grip during the downswing.
- a transverse axis expresses time (s)
- a longitudinal axis expresses a speed (m/s) of the grip.
- a grip deceleration ratio R V (unit: %) is expressed by the following Equation (16).
- a grip deceleration time ratio R T (unit: %) is expressed by the following Equation (17).
- the sensor unit 10 may be attached to the vicinity of a portion of the golf club 3 held by the user 2 , and a speed of the sensor unit 10 may be regarded as a speed of the grip. Therefore, first, the swing analysis portion 211 computes a speed of the sensor unit 10 at the time point t on the basis of differences between coordinates of a position of the sensor unit 10 at each time point t from the top time point t top to the impact time point t impact (during the downswing) and coordinates of a position of the sensor unit 10 at the previous time point.
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes the magnitude of the speed of the sensor unit 10 at each time point t, sets the maximum value thereof as V 1 , and sets the magnitude of the speed at the impact time point t impact as V 2 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 specifies a time point t vmax at which the magnitude of the speed of the sensor unit 10 becomes the maximum value V 1 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 computes the grip deceleration ratio R V and the grip deceleration time ratio R T according to Equations (16) and (17), respectively.
- the swing analysis portion 211 may regard a speed of the grip end as a speed of the grip, and may compute the speed of the grip end on the basis of coordinates of a position of the grip end at each time point t during the downswing, so as to obtain the grip deceleration ratio R V and the grip deceleration time ratio R T through the above-described computation.
- FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining definition of an attack angle ⁇ .
- the XYZ coordinate system is defined which has a target line indicating a target hitting direction as an X axis, an axis on a horizontal plane which is perpendicular to the X axis as a Y axis, and a vertical direction (a direction opposite to the gravitational direction) as a Z axis
- FIG. 21 illustrates the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis.
- the target line indicates, for example, a target direction in which a ball flies straight.
- a point R is a ball hitting point at which the head 3 a of the golf club 3 comes into contact with a golf ball 4
- a curve L 1 indicates a part of a trajectory during a swing of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 in an XZ plane
- a straight line L 2 is a tangential line of the curve L 1 at the hall hitting point R in the XZ plane.
- an attack angle is defined as an angle ⁇ of the straight line L 2 with respect to the XY plane (horizontal plane) S XY .
- the attack angle ⁇ can be said to be an angle formed between a direction of the tangential line (straight line L 2 ) which is in contact with the trajectory (curve L 1 ) of a swing of the head (ball hitting portion) 3 a of the golf club (exercise appliance) 3 and a target hitting direction along the X axis.
- the target hitting direction also includes a direction orthogonal to the face surface of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 , a hitting direction which is set in advance by the user, a direction connecting a direct distance to a hole cup, and the like.
- a direction (a clockwise direction in FIG. 21 ) in which +Z (vertically upward direction) of the Z axis rotates in the +X direction (rightward direction toward the drawing surface) of the X axis is defined as a first sign
- a sign reverse to the first sign is defined as a second sign.
- the first sign is, for example, negative ( ⁇ )
- the second sign is positive (+).
- a sign of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ illustrated in FIG. 21 is the first sign (negative).
- the attack angle ⁇ 0° occurs at the time of a down blow in which the head 3 a is incident to the ball hitting point R obliquely downwardly toward the drawing surface.
- the attack angle ⁇ >0° occurs at the time of a down blow in which the head 3 a is incident to the ball hitting point R obliquely upwardly toward the drawing surface.
- the face angle (second angle) ⁇ illustrated in FIG. 18 when the Z axis is a rotation axis, a direction (a clockwise direction toward the drawing surface in FIG. 18 ) in which +Y of the Y axis rotates in the +X direction of the X axis is defined as a third sign, and a sign reverse to the third sign is defined as a fourth sign.
- the third sign is, for example, negative ( ⁇ ), and the fourth sign is positive (+).
- a sign of the face angle (second angle) ⁇ illustrated in FIG. 18 is the third sign (negative).
- the face angle ⁇ 0° occurs when the head 3 a reaches impact in a closed state with an inside-out trajectory.
- the face angle ⁇ >0° occurs when the head 3 a reaches impact in an open state with an outside-in trajectory.
- the swing analysis portion 211 illustrated in FIG. 10 may include a first angle calculator which calculates the attack angle ⁇ and a second angle calculator which calculates the face angle ⁇ .
- the first and second angle calculators respectively calculate the first and second angles ⁇ and ⁇ on the basis of the relationships illustrated in FIGS. 21 and 18 by using an output from the data acquisition portion 210 illustrated in FIG. 10 , that is, an output from the sensor unit 10 .
- FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a swing analysis process (swing analysis method) performed by the processing section 21 .
- the processing section 21 performs the swing analysis process, for example, according to the procedures shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22 by executing the swing analysis program 240 stored in the storage section 24 .
- the flowchart of FIG. 22 will be described.
- the processing section 21 waits for the user 2 to perform a measurement starting operation (the operation in step S 2 in FIG. 4 ) (N in step S 10 ), transmits a measurement starting command to the sensor unit 10 if the measurement starting operation is performed (Y in step S 10 ), and starts to acquire measured data from the sensor unit 10 (step S 12 ).
- the processing section 21 instructs the user 2 to take an address attitude (step S 14 ).
- the user 2 takes the address attitude in response to the instruction, and stands still for a predetermined period of time or more (step S 4 in FIG. 4 ).
- the processing section 21 notifies the user 2 of permission of swing starting (step S 18 ).
- the processing section 21 outputs, for example, a predetermined sound, or an LED is provided in the sensor unit 10 , and the LED is lighted, so that the user 2 is notified of permission of swing starting.
- the user 2 confirms the notification and then starts a swing action (the action in step S 6 in FIG. 4 ).
- the processing section 21 performs processes in step S 20 and subsequent steps after completion of the swing action of the user 2 , or from before completion of the swing action.
- the processing section 21 computes an initial position and an initial attitude of the sensor unit 10 by using the measured data (measured data during standing still (at address) of the user 2 ) acquired from the sensor unit 10 (step S 20 ).
- the processing section 21 detects a swing starting timing, a top timing, and an impact timing by using the measured data acquired from the sensor unit 10 (step S 22 ).
- the processing section 21 computes a position and an attitude of the sensor unit 10 during the swing action of the user 2 in parallel to the process in step S 22 , or before and after the process in step S 22 (step S 24 ).
- steps S 26 to S 34 the processing section 21 computes values of various indexes regarding the swing by using at least some of the measured data acquired from the sensor unit 10 , the swing starting, top and impact timings detected in step S 22 , and the position and the attitude of the sensor unit 10 computed in step S 24 .
- the processing section 21 computes the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP in step S 26 .
- the processing section 21 computes a position of the head 3 a at halfway back and a position of the head 3 a at halfway down in step S 28 .
- the processing section 21 computes a head speed, the face angle ⁇ , the attack angle ⁇ , and the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ in step S 30 .
- the processing section 21 computes the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top in step S 32 .
- the processing section 21 computes the grip deceleration ratio R V and the grip deceleration time ratio R T in step S 34 .
- the processing section 21 generates the swing analysis data 248 by using the various indexes calculated in steps S 26 to S 34 , transmits the swing analysis data to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 (step S 36 ), and finishes the swing analysis process.
- order of the respective steps may be changed as appropriate within an allowable range, some of the steps may be omitted or changed, and other steps may be added thereto.
- FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 .
- the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 is configured to include a processing section 31 , a communication section 32 , and a storage section 34 .
- the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 may have a configuration in which some of the constituent elements are deleted or changed as appropriate, or may have a configuration in which other constituent elements are added thereto.
- the storage section 34 is constituted of, for example, various IC memories such as a ROM, a flash ROM, and a RAM, or a recording medium such as a hard disk or a memory card.
- the storage section 34 stores a program for the processing section 31 performing various calculation processes or a control process, or various programs or data for realizing application functions.
- the storage section 34 stores a swing diagnosis program 340 which is read by the processing section 31 and executes a swing diagnosis process.
- the swing diagnosis program 340 may be stored in a nonvolatile recording medium (computer readable recording medium) in advance, or the swing diagnosis program 340 may be received from a server (not illustrated) by the processing section 31 via the network 40 , and may be stored in the storage section 34 .
- the storage section 34 stores (preserves) a swing analysis data list 341 including a plurality of pieces of swing analysis data 248 generated by the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the swing analysis data 248 generated whenever the processing section 21 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 analyzes a swing action of the user 2 is sequentially added to the swing analysis data list 341 .
- the storage section 34 stores a V zone score table 342 , a rotation score table 343 , an impact score table 344 , a down blow score table 345 , an upper blow score table 346 , and a swing efficiency score table 347 .
- the score tables will be described later in detail.
- the storage section 34 is used as a work region of the processing section 31 , and temporarily stores results of calculation executed by the processing section 31 according to various programs, and the like.
- the storage section 34 may store data which is required to be preserved for a long period of time among pieces of data generated through processing of the processing section 31 .
- the communication section 32 performs data communication with the communication section 27 (refer to FIG. 10 ) of the swing analysis apparatus 20 via the network 40 .
- the communication section 32 performs a process of receiving the swing analysis data 248 from the communication section 27 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 , and transmitting the swing analysis data 248 to the processing section 31 .
- the communication section 32 performs a process of transmitting information required to display the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 to the communication section 27 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 , or a process of receiving selected information on the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 from the communication section 27 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 and transmitting the selected information to the processing section 31 .
- the communication section 32 performs a process of receiving information required to display the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG.
- the communication section 32 performs a process of receiving input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button on the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 being pressed from the communication section 27 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 , transmitting the input data to the processing section 31 , receiving diagnosis result information (scores or a total score of a plurality of items indicating features of a swing of the user 2 ) based on the input data from the processing section 31 , and transmitting the diagnosis information and the lesson information to the communication section 27 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the communication section 32 performs a process of receiving information required to display the swing diagnosis screen illustrated in FIG. 9 from the processing section 31 , and transmitting the information to the communication section 27 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the processing section 31 performs a process of receiving the swing analysis data 248 from the swing analysis apparatus 20 via the communication section 32 and storing the swing analysis data 248 in the storage section 34 (adding the swing analysis data to the swing analysis data list 341 ), according to various programs.
- the processing section 31 performs a process of receiving various pieces of information from the swing analysis apparatus 20 via the communication section 32 , and transmitting information required to display various screens (the respective screens illustrated in FIGS. 7, 8 and 9 ) to the swing analysis apparatus 20 , according to various programs.
- the processing section 31 performs other various control processes.
- the processing section 31 functions as a data acquisition portion 310 , a score calculation portion 311 , and a storage processing portion 312 by executing the swing diagnosis program 340 , and performs a diagnosis process (swing diagnosis process) on the swing analysis data 248 selected from the swing analysis data list 341 .
- the data acquisition portion 310 performs a process of receiving the swing analysis data 248 received from the swing analysis apparatus 20 by the communication section 32 and transmitting the swing analysis data 248 to the storage processing portion 312 .
- the data acquisition portion 310 performs a process of receiving various pieces of information received from the swing analysis apparatus 20 by the communication section 32 and transmitting the information to the score calculation portion 311 .
- the storage processing portion 312 performs read/write processes of various programs or various data for the storage section 34 .
- the storage processing portion 312 performs a process of receiving the swing analysis data 248 from the data acquisition portion 310 and storing the swing analysis data 248 in the storage section 34 (adding the swing analysis data to the swing analysis data list 341 ), a process of reading the swing analysis data 248 from the swing analysis data list 341 stored in the storage section 34 , or the like.
- the storage processing portion 312 performs a process of reading the V zone score table 342 , the rotation score table 343 , the impact score table 344 , the down blow score table 345 , the upper blow score table 346 , and the swing efficiency score table 347 stored in the storage section 34 .
- the score calculation portion 311 performs a process of calculating scores (levels) of a plurality of items on the basis of data regarding a swing.
- the data regarding a swing may be input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button on the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 being pressed, may be the swing analysis data 248 selected on the selection screen illustrated in FIG. 7 , and may include both of the data.
- the score calculation portion 311 performs a process of calculating scores on the basis of the swing analysis data 248 selected from the swing analysis data list 341 .
- the score calculation portion 311 performs a process of calculating scores on the basis of data (pseudo-data) in which at least a part of the selected swing analysis data 248 is edited.
- a plurality of items which are score calculation targets include a first item regarding at least one of a backswing and a downswing.
- the first item may include an item indicating a relationship among at least one virtual plane, a position of the head 3 a (an example of a ball hitting portion) of the golf club 3 (an example of an exercise appliance) at a first timing during the backswing, and a position of the head 3 a at a second timing during the downswing.
- the first timing may be the time at which the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 becomes a direction along the horizontal direction during the backswing.
- the second timing may be the time at which the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 becomes a direction along the horizontal direction during the downswing.
- At least one virtual plane may include the shaft plane SP which is a first virtual plane specified on the basis of the first line segment 51 which is a first axis along a target hit ball direction (target line) in the XY plane as a reference plane, and the second line segment 52 which is a second axis along the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 before starting a backswing.
- the time before starting a backswing may be the time of address (when the user 2 takes an address attitude and stands still).
- At least one virtual plane may include the Hogan plane HP which is a second virtual plane (that is, the second virtual plane which forms a first angle ⁇ with the first virtual plane) specified on the basis of the first line segment 51 which is a first axis along a target hit ball direction (target line) in the XY plane as a reference plane, and the third line segment 53 which is a third axis forming the first angle ⁇ with the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 before starting a backswing.
- the Hogan plane HP which is a second virtual plane (that is, the second virtual plane which forms a first angle ⁇ with the first virtual plane) specified on the basis of the first line segment 51 which is a first axis along a target hit ball direction (target line) in the XY plane as a reference plane
- the third line segment 53 which is a third axis forming the first angle ⁇ with the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 before starting a backswing.
- At least one virtual plane may include only one of the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP. At least one virtual plane may include other virtual planes (for example, a plane interposed between the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP, a plane outside the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP, and a plane intersecting at least one of the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP) instead of the shaft plane SP or the Hogan plane HP.
- other virtual planes for example, a plane interposed between the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP, a plane outside the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP, and a plane intersecting at least one of the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP
- the first item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as a “V zone” item) indicating a relationship among four indexes of a swing, that is, the “shaft plane SP”, the “Hogan plane HP”, a “position of the head 3 a at halfway back”, and a “position of the head 3 a at halfway down”.
- the first item may include an item regarding swing efficiency.
- the item regarding swing efficiency may be an item indicating a relationship between a deceleration amount and a deceleration period of the grip of the golf club 3 in a downswing.
- the first item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as a “swing efficiency” item) indicating a relationship between a “grip deceleration ratio” which is an index based on the deceleration amount of the grip and a “grip deceleration time ratio” which is an index based on the deceleration period of the grip, as the item regarding swing efficiency.
- the plurality of items which are score calculation targets also include a second item regarding impact (at ball hitting).
- the second item may include an item indicating a relationship between an incidence angle of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 and an inclination of the head 3 a at impact (at ball hitting).
- the second item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as an “impact” item) indicating a relationship between the “club path (incidence angle) ⁇ ” which is an index based on the incidence angle of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 at impact and the “relative face angle ⁇ ” which is an index based on the inclination of the head 3 a at impact.
- the second item may include an item indicating a relationship between an attack angle of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 and an absolute face angle at impact (at ball hitting).
- the second item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as a “down blow” item or an “upper blow” item) indicating a relationship between the “attack angle ⁇ ” which depends on a position of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 and the lowest point thereof at impact and the “absolute face angle ⁇ ” which is an index based on the inclination of the head 3 a at impact.
- the plurality of items which are score calculation targets may also include a third item regarding the time at which a swing transitions from a backswing to a downswing, and the time of impact (the time of ball hitting).
- the third item may include an item indicating a relationship between a rotation angle about the long axis of the golf club 3 at the time (at top) at which a swing transitions from a backswing to a downswing and an inclination of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 at impact (at ball hitting).
- the third item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as a “rotation” item) indicating a relationship between the “shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top” which is an index based on the rotation angle about the long axis of the golf club 3 at the top timing, and the “(absolute) face angle ⁇ ” which is an index based on the inclination of the head 3 a at impact.
- the score calculation portion 311 performs a process of calculating a total score on the basis of the scores of the plurality of items.
- the processing section 31 transmits information regarding the scores or the total score of the plurality of items, calculated by the score calculation portion 311 , to the swing analysis apparatus 20 via the communication section 32 .
- the processing section 31 also functions as an output section which outputs the information regarding the scores (levels) or the total score of the plurality of items.
- the processing section 31 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 performs a process of calculating scores and a total score of a plurality of items indicating features of a swing as a swing analysis process.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “V zone” item depending on in which regions positions of the head 3 a at halfway back and halfway down are included among a plurality of regions determined based on the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP (V zone).
- FIGS. 24A and 24B are diagrams illustrating examples of relationships among the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP (V zone), and a plurality of regions.
- FIG. 24A illustrates relationships among the shaft plane SP, the Hogan plane HP, and five regions A to E when viewed from a negative side of the X axis (when projected onto the YZ plane).
- FIG. 24B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the shaft plane SP, the Hogan plane HP, and an attitude of the user 2 .
- the region B is a predetermined space including the Hogan plane HP
- the region D is a predetermined space including the shaft plane SP.
- the region C is a region interposed between the region B and the region D (a space between an interface S BC with region B and an interface S CD with the region D).
- the region A is a space in contact with the region B in an interface S AB on an opposite side to the region C.
- the region E is a space in contact with the region D in an interface S DE on an opposite side to the region C.
- the interfaces may be set so that, on the YZ plane, the Hogan plane HP is located exactly at the center of the interface S AB and the interface S BC , the shaft plane SP is located exactly at the center of the interface S CD and the interface S DE , and angles of the region B, the region C, and the region D about the origin O (X axis) are the same as each other.
- an interface of the region A opposite to the interface S AB is set in the XZ plane in FIG. 24A .
- a swing that causes a Z coordinate of a position of the head 3 a at halfway back or halfway down to be negative cannot be expected, and an interface of the region E opposite to the interface S DE is Set in the XY plane.
- an interface of the region A or the region E may be set so that an angle of the region A or the region E about the origin O (X axis) is the same as angles of the region B, the region C, and the region D.
- the score calculation portion 311 sets the interface S AB , the interface S BC , the interface S CD , and the interface S DE of the regions A to E on the basis of coordinates of each of the four vertices U 1 , U 2 , S 1 , and S 2 of the shaft plane SP and coordinates of each of the four vertices U 1 , U 2 , H 1 , and H 2 of the Hogan plane HP, included in data (selected swing analysis data 248 ) regarding a swing.
- the score calculation portion 311 determines in which region of the regions A to E coordinates of a position of the head 3 a at halfway back and coordinates of a position of the head 3 a at halfway down included in the data (selected swing analysis data 248 ) regarding the swing are included.
- Information regarding a determination result thereof is transmitted to the swing analysis apparatus 20 , and is used as the information regarding the “sex” and the “region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway down is included” in the input data editing screen illustrated in FIG. 8 .
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to the determination result by referring to the V zone score table 342 and by using information regarding a “region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway back is included” and a “region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway down is included”, included in the data (diagnosis target input data) regarding the swing.
- the V zone score table 342 defines a score for each combination of the region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway back is included and the region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway down is included. For example, in a case where a position of the head 3 a at halfway back is included in the region A, and a position of the head 3 a at halfway down is included in the region A, a score is pv 1 .
- scores pv 1 to pv 25 illustrated in FIG. 25 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 may calculate a lower score as a hit ball predicted on the basis of a relationship among the shaft plane SP, the Hogan plane HP, the position of the head 3 a at halfway back, and the position of the head 3 a at halfway down becomes more easily curved.
- the term “easily curved” may indicate that a trajectory after ball hitting is easily curved (easily sliced or hooked), and may indicate that a hit ball direction is easily deviated relative to a target direction (target line).
- the score calculation portion 311 may calculate a higher score as a hit ball more easily flies straight.
- the term “easily flies straight” may indicate that a trajectory after ball hitting is hardly curved (easily straightened), and may indicate that a hit ball direction is hardly deviated relative to a target direction (target line).
- pv 21 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points.
- pv 13 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “rotation” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top and the face angle ⁇ is included. Specifically, first, the score calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range each of the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top and the face angle 4 included in data (target diagnosis input data) regarding a swing is included. Next, the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the rotation score table 343 .
- the rotation score table 343 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top is included and a range in which the face angle ⁇ is included.
- a range in which the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than ⁇ 1”, “ ⁇ 1 or more and less than ⁇ 2”, “ ⁇ 2 or more and less than ⁇ 3”, “ ⁇ 3 or more and less than ⁇ 4”, and “ ⁇ 4 or more”.
- a range in which the face angle 4 is included is classified into seven ranges such as “less than ⁇ 1”, “ ⁇ 1 or more and less than ⁇ 2”, “ ⁇ 2 or more and less than ⁇ 3”, “ ⁇ 3 or more and less than ⁇ 4”, “ ⁇ 4 or more and less than ⁇ 5”, “ ⁇ 5 or more and less than ⁇ 6”, and “ ⁇ 6 or more”.
- a score is pr 1 in a case where the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top is included in the range of “less than ⁇ 1”, and the face angle ⁇ is included in the range of “less than ⁇ 1”, a score is pr 1 .
- Each of scores pr 1 to pr 35 illustrated in FIG. 26 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 may calculate a lower score as a hit ball predicted on the basis of a relationship between the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top and the face angle ⁇ becomes more easily curved.
- the face surface of the golf club 3 is considerably open in a state where the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top is extremely large, it is expected that the face surface is not completely returned to a square at impact, and thus a hit ball is easily curved.
- a state in which the face angle ⁇ is extremely large is a state in which the face surface at impact is considerably open, and a state in which the face angle ⁇ is extremely small (a negative state in which an absolute value thereof is great) is a state in which the face surface at impact is considerably closed. In either state, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved.
- pr 29 or pr 35 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points.
- the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top is small, it is expected that the face surface is completely returned to the square at impact, and thus a hit ball easily flies straight. If the face angle ⁇ is close to 0°, the face surface at impact is close to the square, and thus it is expected that a hit ball easily flies straight.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively high score (for example, 5 points maximum). Therefore, in the example illustrated in FIG. 26 , pr 4 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “impact” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ and the relative face angle ⁇ is included. Specifically, first, the score calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ included in data (target diagnosis input data) regarding a swing is included. The score calculation portion 311 calculates the relative face angle ⁇ by subtracting the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ from the face angle ⁇ included in the data (diagnosis target input data) regarding the swing (refer to FIG. 18 ), and determines in which range the relative face angle ⁇ is included. Next, the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the impact score table 344 .
- the impact score table 344 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the relative face angle ⁇ is included and a range in which the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ is included.
- a range in which the relative face angle ⁇ is included is classified into five ranges such as “ ⁇ 1 or more”, “less than ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 or more”, “less than ⁇ 2 and ⁇ 3 or more”, “less than ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 or more”, and “less than ⁇ 4”.
- a range in which the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than ⁇ 1”, “ ⁇ 1 or more and less than ⁇ 2”, “ ⁇ 2 or more and less than ⁇ 3”, “ ⁇ 3 or more and less than ⁇ 4”, and “ ⁇ 4 or more”.
- a score is pi 1 in a case where the relative face angle ⁇ is included in the range of “ ⁇ 1 or more”, and the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ is included in the range of “less than ⁇ 1”, a score is pi 1 .
- Each of scores pi 1 to pi 25 illustrated in FIG. 27 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 may calculate a lower score as a hit ball predicted on the basis of the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ and the relative face angle ⁇ becomes more easily curved.
- a state in which the relative face angle ⁇ is extremely large is a state in which the face surface at impact is open, and a state in which the face angle ⁇ is extremely small (a negative state in which an absolute value thereof is great) is a state in which the face surface at impact is considerably closed.
- a state in which the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ is extremely large, a trajectory of the head 3 a at impact becomes a considerably inside-out trajectory, and thus it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved.
- a trajectory of the head 3 a at impact becomes a considerably outside-in trajectory, and thus it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved.
- the relative face angle ⁇ is included in the range of “ ⁇ 1 or more” or “less than ⁇ 4”
- the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ is included in the range of “less than ⁇ 1” or “ ⁇ 4 or more”
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively low score. Therefore, in the example illustrated in FIG. 27 , pi 1 , pi 5 , pi 21 , and pi 25 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively high score (for example, 5 points maximum). Therefore, in the example illustrated in FIG. 27 , pi 13 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “down blow” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the attack angle ⁇ and the absolute face angle ⁇ is included in a case where an iron is selected as the golf club 3 . Specifically, first, the score calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range the attack angle ⁇ illustrated in FIG. 21 is included. The score calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range the face angle ⁇ illustrated in FIG. 18 is included. Next, the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the down blow score table 345 as illustrated in FIG. 28 .
- the down blow score table 345 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the attack angle ⁇ is included and a range in which the absolute face angle ⁇ is included.
- a range in which the attack angle ⁇ is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than ⁇ 1”, “ ⁇ 1 or more and less than ⁇ 2”, “ ⁇ 2 or more and less than ⁇ 3”, “ ⁇ 3 or more and less than 0”, and “+ ⁇ 4 or more” (where ⁇ 1> ⁇ 2> ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 ⁇ 0).
- a range in which the absolute face angle ⁇ is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than ⁇ 1”, “ ⁇ 1 or more and 0 or less”, “more than 0 and less than + ⁇ 1”, “+ ⁇ 1 or more and less than + ⁇ 2”, and “+ ⁇ 2 or more” (where ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2).
- a score is pd 1 in a case where the attack angle ⁇ is included in the range of “less than ⁇ 1”, and the absolute face angle ⁇ is included in the range of “less than ⁇ 1”, a score is pd 1 .
- scores Pd 5 , Pd 10 , Pd 15 , Pd 20 , and Pd 25 may be the lowest score.
- an absolute value of the threshold value ⁇ 4 may be infinitely small ( ⁇ 4 ⁇ 0).
- the second sign (positive) of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ at impact indicates an upper blow in which the lowest point of the club head 3 a during a downswing occurs before the impact. In an iron club requiring a down blow, if it is determined that a sign of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is the second sign (positive), the lowest score may be calculated, and thus a swing may be evaluated to be bad.
- scores Pd 21 to Pd 24 illustrated in FIG. 28 satisfying this condition may be set to be low.
- the first sign (negative) of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ at impact indicates a down blow in which the lowest point of the club head 3 a during a downswing occurs after the impact.
- attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is zero, a true level blow occurs, but a level blow may also be regarded to occur in a case where an absolute value of an attack angle having the first sign (negative) is small. Even in this case, in a case where it is determined that the absolute face angle (second angle) ⁇ is equal to or more than the first threshold value ⁇ 2 indicating an excessively open state, a low score may be calculated, and thus a swing may be evaluated to be bad, even if the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ indicates a down blow.
- a sign of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is the first sign (negative)
- scores Pd 8 , Pd 9 , Pd 13 and Pd 14 satisfying this condition may be set to be highest.
- the case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow or a level blow.
- an absolute value of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is smaller than the second threshold value ⁇ 2
- an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) ⁇ is smaller than the third threshold value ⁇ 1
- a sign of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is the first sign (negative)
- a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) ⁇ is the fourth sign (positive)
- scores Pd 16 to Pd 19 satisfying this condition may be set as low scores.
- the case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow or a level blow.
- the case where a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) ⁇ is the fourth sign (positive) corresponds to the time at which the face surface is open.
- an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) ⁇ is equal to or greater than the third threshold value ⁇ 1 and is smaller than the first threshold value ⁇ 2, low scores are set.
- the scores Pd 21 to Pd 24 illustrated in FIG. 28 may be the same as the scores Pd 16 to Pd 19 illustrated in FIG. 28 .
- scores Pd 1 , Pd 2 , Pd 3 and Pd 4 illustrated in FIG. 28 satisfying this condition may be set as intermediate scores higher than the low scores.
- the case where a sign of the first angle corresponding to an attack angle is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow or a level blow.
- a score Pd 7 illustrated in FIG. 28 satisfying this condition is set as a score which is lower than the highest score and is higher than the intermediate score.
- the case where a sign of the first angle corresponding to an attack angle is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow.
- an absolute value of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value ⁇ 1 and is smaller than second threshold value ⁇ 2
- the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is in a range similar to an appropriate range.
- the case where a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) ⁇ is the third sign (negative) corresponds to the time at which a face angle of the head (ball hitting portion) 3 a with respect to a target hitting direction at impact indicates a closed state.
- an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) ⁇ is smaller than the third threshold value ⁇ 1, a score which is lower than the highest score and is higher than the intermediate score is set.
- a score Pd 12 illustrated in FIG. 28 satisfying this condition is set as a score which is lower than the highest score and is higher than the intermediate score.
- the case where a sign of the first angle corresponding to an attack angle is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow.
- an absolute value of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value ⁇ 1 and is smaller than second threshold value ⁇ 2
- the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ is in a range similar to an appropriate range.
- the case where a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) ⁇ is the fourth sign (positive) corresponds to the time at which a face angle of the head (ball hitting portion) 3 a with respect to a target hitting direction at impact indicates an open state.
- an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) ⁇ is smaller than the third threshold value ⁇ 1, a score which is lower than the highest score and is higher than the intermediate score is set.
- a lower score may be calculated as an absolute value of the second angle becomes greater (for example, Pd 6 ⁇ Pd 7 ⁇ Pd 8 , Pd 9 , Pd 11 ⁇ Pd 12 ⁇ Pd 13 ).
- a lower score is calculated as an absolute value of the second angle becomes greater (for example, Pd 1 ⁇ Pd 6 , Pd 2 ⁇ Pd 7 , Pd 3 ⁇ Pd 8 , and Pd 4 ⁇ Pd 9 ).
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “upper blow” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the attack angle ⁇ and the absolute face angle ⁇ is included in a case where a driver (wood) is selected as the golf club 3 . Specifically, the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the upper blow score table 346 , for example, as illustrated in FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 29 may be created, for example, by changing signs of the attack angle (first angle) ⁇ illustrated in FIG. 28 .
- first angle first angle
- second angle positive
- scores pu 21 to pu 24 satisfying this condition are the lowest score.
- values of ⁇ 1 to ⁇ 4 or values of ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 may be the same as or different from each other.
- values of Pd 1 to Pd 25 and values of Pu 1 to Pu 25 may be the same as or different from each other.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “swing efficiency” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the grip deceleration ratio R V and the grip deceleration time ratio R T is included. Specifically, first, the score calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range each of the grip deceleration ratio R V and the grip deceleration time ratio R T included in data (target diagnosis input data) regarding a swing is included. Next, the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the swing efficiency score table 347 .
- the swing efficiency score table 347 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the grip deceleration ratio R V is included and a range in which the grip deceleration time ratio R T is included.
- a range in which the grip deceleration ratio R V is included is classified into six ranges such as “nu 1 or more”, “less than nu 1 and nu 2 or more”, “less than nu 2 and nu 3 or more”, “less than nu 3 and nu 4 or more”, “less than nu 4 and nu 5 or more”, and “less than nu 5 ”.
- a range in which the grip deceleration time ratio R T is included is classified into six ranges such as “nup 1 or more”, “less than nup 1 and nup 2 or more”, “less than nup 2 and nup 3 or more”, “less than nup 3 and nup 4 or more”, “less than nup 4 and nup 5 or more”, and “less than nup 5 ”.
- a score is ps 1 in a case where the grip deceleration ratio R V is included in the range of “nu 1 or more”, and the grip deceleration time ratio R T is included in the range of “nup 1 or more”, a score is ps 1 .
- Each of scores ps 1 to ps 36 illustrated in FIG. 30 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 may calculate a higher score as swing efficiency predicted on the basis of the grip deceleration ratio R V and the grip deceleration time ratio R T becomes higher.
- ps 1 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points
- ps 36 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of a “carry” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges a ball arrival point (carry) ⁇ estimated on the basis of a relative face angle ⁇ and a head speed ⁇ is included. Specifically, first, the score calculation portion 311 determines in which range each of the relative face angle ⁇ and the ball arrival point (carry) ⁇ included in data (diagnosis target input data) regarding a swing is included. Next, the score calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to a ball carry score table 350 illustrated in FIG. 31 .
- the ball carry score table 350 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the ball arrival point (carry) ⁇ is included and a range in which the relative face angle ⁇ is included.
- a range in which the ball arrival point (carry) ⁇ is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than ⁇ 1”, “ ⁇ 1 or more and less than ⁇ 2”, “ ⁇ 2 or more and less than ⁇ 3”, “ ⁇ 3 or more and less than ⁇ 4”, and “ ⁇ 4 or more”.
- a range in which the relative face angle ⁇ is included is classified into seven ranges such as “less than ⁇ 1”, “ ⁇ 1 or more and less than ⁇ 2”, “ ⁇ 2 or more and less than ⁇ 3”, “ ⁇ 3 or more and less than ⁇ 4”, “ ⁇ 4 or more and less than ⁇ 5”, “ ⁇ 5 or more and less than ⁇ 6”, and “ ⁇ 6 or more”.
- a score is pk 1 .
- scores pk 1 to pk 35 illustrated in FIG. 31 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points.
- the score calculation portion 311 may calculate a lower score as a ball carry predicted on the basis of a relationship between the ball arrival point (carry) ⁇ and the relative face angle ⁇ becomes shorter. For example, in a case where the ball arrival point (carry) ⁇ is included in the range of “less than ⁇ 1”, and the relative face angle ⁇ is included in the range of “less than ⁇ 1”, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved in a hooked state or a carry is reduced (a carry is short), or the relative face angle 1 is included in the range of “ ⁇ 6 or more”, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved in a sliced state or a carry is reduced (a carry is short). Thus, the score calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively low score. Therefore, in the example illustrated in FIG. 31 , pk 1 or pk 6 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points.
- the relative face angle ⁇ is close to 0°, it is expected that a hit ball easily flies straight and a carry is increased (a carry is long).
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively high score (for example, 5 points maximum). Therefore, in the example illustrated in FIG. 31 , pk 32 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points.
- a level is calculated on the basis of the first index and the second index.
- a level can be calculated through positioning of a swing in a two-axis coordinate system formed of the first index and the second index, and thus a swing of a golf club (exercise appliance) at impact can be objectively determined.
- a score is added to each region in advance on the basis of a relationship between the first index and the second index, and thus a lookup table can be used.
- a score can be specified on the basis of the first index and the second index by using the lookup table, and the score can be calculated as a level.
- a swing is calculated as a score on the basis of the first index and the second index by using the lookup table, it is possible to easily and appropriately perform an objective determination on a swing of a golf club (exercise appliance) at impact.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates a total score on the basis of the score of the “V zone” item, the score of the “rotation” item, the score of the “impact” item, the score of the “down blow”, the score of the “upper blow” item, the score of the “swing efficiency” item, and the score of the “carry” item.
- the score calculation portion 311 may multiply the score of each item by 4 so that 20 points maximum is obtained, and may add all the scores together so as to calculate a total score.
- a score of 5 points maximum of each item is displayed as a radar chart, and the score of each item is multiplied by 4, and 64 points obtained by adding all the scores together is a total score.
- the score calculation portion 311 may increase a weight of a highly important item in diagnosis (evaluation) of a swing and may add scores of the items together so as to calculate a total score.
- FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a process performed by the processing section 21 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 in relation to the swing diagnosis process.
- FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of the swing diagnosis process (swing diagnosis method) performed by the processing section 31 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 .
- the processing section 31 an example of a computer
- the processing section 31 performs the swing diagnosis process, for example, according to the procedures of the flowchart of FIG. 33 by executing the swing diagnosis program 340 stored in the storage section 34 .
- FIGS. 32 and 33 will be described.
- the processing section 21 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 transmits user identification information allocated to the user 2 , to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 (step S 100 in FIG. 32 ).
- the processing section 31 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the user identification information, and transmits list information of the swing analysis data 248 corresponding to the user identification information (step S 200 in FIG. 33 ).
- the processing section 21 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 receives the list information of the swing analysis data 248 , and displays a selection screen ( FIG. 7 ) of the swing analysis data on the display section 25 (step S 110 in FIG. 32 ).
- the processing section 21 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 waits for the swing analysis data 248 to be selected on the selection screen of the swing analysis data (N in step S 120 in FIG. 32 ), and transmits selected information of the swing analysis data to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 (step S 130 in FIG. 32 ) if the information is selected (Y in step S 120 in FIG. 32 ).
- the processing section 31 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the selected information of the swing analysis data (step S 210 in FIG. 33 ), and determines the sex (a male or a female) and the type of golf club (a driver or an iron) on the basis of the swing analysis data 248 which is selected on the basis of the selected information (step S 220 in FIG. 33 ).
- the processing section 31 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 determines a region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway back is included and a region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway down is included on the basis of the selected swing analysis data 248 (step S 230 in FIG. 33 ).
- the processing section 31 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 transmits various pieces of information based on the selected swing analysis data (step S 240 in FIG. 33 ).
- the various pieces of information based on the selected swing analysis data 248 include the determination result in step S 220 , the determination result in step S 230 , and information regarding some index values (the face angle ⁇ , the attack angle ⁇ , the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ , the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top, the head speed, the grip deceleration ratio R V , and the grip deceleration time ratio R T ) included in the selected swing analysis data.
- the processing section 21 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 receives the various pieces of information based on the selected swing analysis data 248 , and displays an editing screen ( FIG. 8 ) of input data on the display section 25 (step S 140 in FIG. 32 ).
- the processing section 21 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 waits for a diagnosis starting operation to be performed on the editing screen of input data (N in step S 150 in FIG. 32 ), and transmits diagnosis target input data to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 (step S 160 in FIG. 32 ) if the diagnosis starting operation is performed (Y in step S 150 in FIG. 32 ).
- the processing section 31 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the diagnosis target input data (step S 250 in FIG. 33 ), and calculates scores and a total score of a plurality of items on the basis of the diagnosis target input data (step S 260 in FIG. 33 ).
- the processing section 31 of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 transmits (outputs) information regarding the scores and the total score of the plurality of items to the swing analysis apparatus 20 (step S 270 in FIG. 33 ), and finishes the swing diagnosis process.
- the processing section 21 of the swing analysis apparatus 20 receives the information regarding the scores and the total score of the plurality of items, displays the swing diagnosis screen ( FIG. 9 ) on the display section 25 (step S 170 in FIG. 32 ), and finishes the process.
- order of the respective steps may be changed as appropriate within an allowable range, some of the steps may be omitted or changed, and other steps may be added thereto.
- order of the respective steps may be changed as appropriate within an allowable range, some of the steps may be omitted or changed, and other steps (for example, calculation of a score of the “carry” item) may be added thereto.
- FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a process (step S 260 in FIG. 33 ) of calculating scores and a total score of a plurality of items in the processing section 31 (score calculation portion 311 ) of the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 .
- the flowchart of FIG. 34 will be described.
- the processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “V zone” item) corresponding to a region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway back is included and a region in which a position of the head 3 a at halfway down is included by referring to the V zone score table 342 stored in the storage section 34 (step S 261 ).
- the processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “rotation” item) corresponding to the shaft axis rotation angle ⁇ top at top and the face angle ⁇ by referring to the rotation score table 343 stored in the storage section 34 (step S 262 ).
- the processing section 31 calculates the relative face angle ⁇ on the basis of the face angle ⁇ and the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ (step S 263 ).
- the processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “impact” item) corresponding to the relative face angle ⁇ and the club path (incidence angle) ⁇ by referring to the impact score table 344 stored in the storage section 34 (step S 264 ).
- the processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “down blow” item) corresponding to the attack angle ⁇ and the absolute face angle ⁇ by referring to the down blow score table 345 stored in the storage section 34 (step S 265 ).
- the processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “upper blow” item) corresponding to the attack angle ⁇ and the absolute face angle ⁇ by referring to the upper blow score table 346 stored in the storage section 34 (step S 265 ).
- the processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “swing efficiency” item) corresponding to the grip deceleration ratio R V and the grip deceleration time ratio R T by referring to the swing efficiency score table 347 stored in the storage section 34 (step S 266 ).
- the processing section 31 calculates a total score on the basis of the score of the “V zone” item calculated in step S 261 , the score of the “rotation” item calculated in step S 262 , the score of the “impact” item calculated in step S 264 , the score of the “down blow” or “upper blow” item calculated in step S 265 , and the score of the “swing efficiency” item calculated in step S 266 , or scores of the “ball curving” item and the “ball shooting direction” item (not illustrated) (step S 267 ).
- the image data generation portion 212 performs a process of generating image data of the swing analysis data 248 (correlation data) as the first analysis information related to each index, and generating image data related to swing analysis data as the second analysis information for another user corresponding to an image (for example, a “ball arrival position”) displayed on the display section 25 .
- the display processing portion 214 displays various images (including text, symbols, and the like in addition to an image corresponding to the image data generated by the image data generation portion 212 ) on the display section 25 .
- FIG. 35 in which a plurality of ball arrival positions are plotted is displayed in a two-axis coordinate system based on a correlation between a carry (yard: Y) expressed by a longitudinal axis as one axis and a width direction position in a fairway FW expressed by a transverse axis as the other axis.
- a carry yard: Y
- a width direction position in a fairway FW expressed by a transverse axis as the other axis.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball arrival position as a display example 1.
- FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball a ball arrival distance and a target region as a display example 2.
- FIG. 37 is a histogram related to a “shooting direction” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position.
- FIG. 38 is a histogram related to “curving” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball arrival position as a display example 1.
- FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball a ball arrival distance and a target region as a display example 2.
- FIG. 37 is a histogram related to a “shooting direction” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position.
- FIG. 38 is a histogram related to “curving” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position.
- FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining display examples illustrating a swing trajectory of a club head of a right-handed subject and a swing trajectory of a club head of a left-handed subject.
- FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a display example in which one of swing trajectories having mirror image shapes due to a difference between dominant hands of subjects is inverted to overlap the other which is not inverted.
- FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a ball arrival distance and a ball flight line (ball flight trajectory) as a display example 3.
- the display section 25 displays the time-series image A 1 which is a region image indicating a set formed by plotting ball arrival positions (refer to FIG. 31 ) related to a plurality of swings, in a two-axis coordinate system in which one axis (longitudinal axis) expresses a ball carry (yard: Y) and the other axis (transverse axis) expresses, for example, a ball width direction position (arrival position) in a fairway FW.
- Ball arrival positions which are estimated on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data obtained in a plurality of swings are displayed in this coordinate system as the time-series image A 1 which is a single region image.
- the time-series image A 1 is generated on the basis of the first analysis information including information related to at least one of a ball shooting direction, ball curving, and a head speed.
- Each ball shooting direction is generated as information such as frequency distribution regions 84 A, 85 A and 86 A as time-series images illustrated in FIG. 37 , for example, in relation to a “club path (incidence angle)”.
- Each ball curving is generated as information such as frequency distribution regions 84 B, 85 B and 86 B as time-series images illustrated in FIG. 38 , for example, in relation to a “relative face angle”.
- evaluation results based on score evaluation using the score table of the “carry” item illustrated in FIG. 31 are plotted.
- the time-series image A 1 indicates a set formed by plotting ball arrival positions related to a plurality of swings, that is, a variation range of arrival positions, and a center region P 1 is displayed as position information of the center thereof.
- a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line indicating a variation range of swing analysis data obtained by analyzing previously performed swings is displayed.
- the magnitude of an area of a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line indicating a variation range of the time-series image A 1 corresponds to the magnitude of variations among a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and thus it can be said that a variation increases as the area of the region becomes larger.
- a message region entitled, for example, “you of the present” may be provided outside the coordinate system, and, a specific index value or additional information related to a ball arrival position of the user 2 may be displayed therein.
- the user 2 can obtain visual information which can be visually recognized specifically and objectively, with respect to the present situation of ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings perform by the user. Consequently, the user 2 can be conscious of and recognize the present ability (level) with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings.
- the first region image AA time-series region images A 1 , A 2 and A 3
- target regions TA 1 and TA 2 are displayed on the display section 25 .
- the display section 25 displays the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 which are three region images each indicating a set formed by plotting ball arrival positions (refer to FIG. 31 ) related to a plurality of swings, in a two-axis coordinate system in which one axis (longitudinal axis) expresses a ball carry (yard: Y) and the other axis (transverse axis) expresses, for example, a ball width direction position (arrival position) in a fairway FW.
- Center regions P 1 , P 2 and P 3 are also displayed in the respectively time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 .
- the display section 25 displays the two target regions TA 1 and TA 2 which the user 2 aims and center regions TP 1 and TP 2 .
- each of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 is generated on the basis of the first analysis information including information related to at least one of a ball shooting direction, ball curving, and a head speed.
- Each ball shooting direction is generated as information such as the frequency distribution regions 84 A, 85 A and 86 A as time-series images illustrated in FIG. 37 , for example, in relation to a “club path (incidence angle)”.
- Each ball curving is generated as information such as the frequency distribution regions 84 B, 85 B and 86 B as time-series images illustrated in FIG. 38 , for example, in relation to a “relative face angle”.
- the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 indicate sets formed by classifying ball arrival positions (estimated values) related to a plurality of swings according to a predetermined period and plotting the ball arrival positions, that is, variation ranges of arrival positions, and the center regions P 1 , P 2 and P 3 are displayed as position information of the centers thereof.
- the time-series image A 1 is a set of data related to swings in a period, for example, from 15 days ago to 21 days ago
- the time-series image A 2 is a set of data related to swings in a period, for example, from 8 days ago to 14 days ago
- the time-series image A 3 is a set of data related to swings in a period, for example, from the present to 7 days ago.
- each of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line indicating a variation range of swing analysis data obtained by analyzing previously performed swings is displayed.
- the magnitude of an area of a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line indicating a variation range of each of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 corresponds to the magnitude of variations among a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and thus a variation increases as the area of the region becomes larger.
- a variation of the time-series image A 3 can be said to be smallest.
- whether or not the user 2 reaches the target in a predetermined period can be determined by checking whether or not the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 come close to the target region TA 1 .
- the images come close to the time-series image A 1 in an order of the time-series image A 1 corresponding to the period from 15 days ago to 21 days ago, the time-series image A 2 corresponding to the period from 8 days ago to 14 days ago, and the time-series image A 3 corresponding to the period from the present to 7 days ago.
- the center region P 1 of the time-series image A 1 , the center region P 2 of the time-series image A 2 , and the center region P 3 of the time-series image A 3 come close to the center region TP 1 of the target region TA 1 in this order substantially along a target line TL connecting the center region P 1 for the user 2 to the center region TP 1 of the target region TA 1 .
- the user 2 can understand that the user reaches the target for three weeks, that is, a skill thereof is improved. Even in a display aspect in which only the center regions P 1 , P 2 and P 3 are displayed without displaying the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 , the same effect can be achieved.
- the plurality of time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 preferably have different display aspects. Specifically, regarding a plurality of time-series display aspects, the time-series image A 1 is displayed with a solid line, the time-series image A 2 is displayed with a dotted line (dashed line), and the time-series image A 3 is displayed with a dot chain line, as different display aspects.
- the user 2 can easily identify at first sight a transition state from the past to the present with respect to the ability (level) related to a ball shooting direction in a plurality of swings.
- a message region entitled, for example, “target setting” or “gap with you” may be provided outside the coordinate system, and a target value of the user 2 , and a specific record value or a target value related to a ball arrival position of the user 2 may be displayed therein.
- a legend region (checkbox) may be provided, and, the display content for each display aspect may be written, such as a “set of analysis data in a period from the present to 7 days ago” and a “set of analysis data in a period from 8 days ago to 14 days ago” as an example of display of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 .
- the user 2 can obtain visual information which can be visually recognized specifically and objectively, with respect to the present situation of ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings perform by the user, in addition to variations and a skill improvement state of the user. Consequently, the user 2 can be conscious of and recognize the present ability (level) with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings.
- the user 2 has a dominant hand, and rotation directions in swing actions are opposite to each other, for example, in a golf swing due to a difference between dominant hands.
- rotation directions of swing trajectories are displayed to be opposite to each other, and thus the comparison cannot be performed through overlapping thereof.
- this can be handled by performing a process of adding dominant hand information in advance and inverting an image as follows.
- FIG. 39 illustrates a display example in which a swing trajectory RS of the head 3 a of the golf club 3 of a right-handed subject and a swing trajectory LS or the head 3 a of the golf club 3 of a left-handed subject are projected onto an X-Z plane of an absolute coordinate system ⁇ XYZ or are displayed in a three-dimensional manner so as to be viewed from the lateral side.
- an intersection O between the X axis and the Y axis is located at the origin of the X axis, is an address position (impact position) of the club head 3 a .
- the swing trajectory RS and the swing trajectory LS have a relationship of mirror image inversion with respect to a reference plane including the Z axis passing through the origin O.
- the swing trajectory RS and the swing trajectory LS have a relationship of a substantial mirror image with respect to the reference plane due to a difference between dominant hands of subjects, and it is possible to automatically determine whether a subject is right-handed or left-handed on the basis of an output from the sensor unit 10 .
- Motion analysis information corresponding to one (for example, LS) of motions (RS, LS) forming a pair having mirror image shapes due to a difference between dominant hands of subjects, illustrated in FIG. 39 is calculated by the swing analysis portion 211 (refer to FIG. 10 ) on the basis of an output from the sensor unit 10 , and is input to the image data generation portion 212 (refer to FIG. 10 ).
- the image data generation portion 212 may invert a sign (+ or ⁇ ) of a value of one motion analysis information so that one (for example, LS) of the motions (RS, LS) forming a pair is displayed as an inverted image (/LS) as illustrated in FIG. 40 .
- one (for example, LS) of the motions (RS, LS) forming a pair is inverted to be displayed on the side where the other (RS) of the motions (RS, LS) forming a pair is displayed.
- an image of a motion for a left dominant hand is displayed in the same orientation as an image of a motion for a right dominant hand. Consequently, the motion for a left dominant hand and the motion for a right dominant hand can be easily compared with each other, and thus it becomes easier to perform motion analysis.
- the swing analysis portion 211 calculates motion analysis information by using an output from the sensor unit 10 .
- the image data generation portion 212 may invert one (for example, LS) in the motion analysis information and may not invert the other (RS) so that an inverted image (for example, /LS) of one of the motions (RS, LS) forming a pair and a noninverted image (RS) of the other (for example, RS) are displayed on a screen in an overlapping manner as illustrated in FIG. 40 .
- the display related to the display example 3 may be performed on the basis of the score table of the “carry” item illustrated in FIG. 31 in relation to the ball arrival point (carry) ⁇ which is estimated on the basis of the relative face angle ⁇ , the head speed ⁇ , and the like.
- the display section 25 is provided with a two-axis coordinate system in which one axis (longitudinal axis) expresses a ball carry (yard: Y) and the other axis (transverse axis) expresses, for example, a ball width direction position (yard: Y) in a fairway FW.
- a ball hitting point Q 1 , ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC 1 and FC 2 , and the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 as three region images each indicating a distribution (variation) of ball arrival positions related to a plurality of swings are displayed in this coordinate system on the display section 25 .
- the display section 25 also displays the target region TA 1 indicating an arrival position region at which the user 2 aims.
- the ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC 1 and FC 2 indicate ball movement trajectories from the ball hitting point Q 1 to an arrival position, estimated on the basis of analysis results which are based on measured data of swings performed by the user 2 .
- the ball flight line (ball flight trajectory) FC 1 indicates that a ball flies in a sliced state, and reaches an arrival position
- the ball flight line (ball flight trajectory) FC 2 indicates that a ball flies linearly (straight), and reaches an arrival position.
- Each of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 indicates a distribution (variation) of estimated ball arrival positions, and a set classified according to a time series is displayed as a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line.
- Each of the plurality of time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 corresponds to a variation between a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings according to the magnitude of an area of the region surrounded by the outer circumferential line. In this example, a large area of the region indicates that a variation is large.
- Such exemplary content is shown in a legend region (checkbox) 96 d 2 . Variation extents of the plurality of time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 may be displayed. In FIG.
- the legends are written, such as “88.2”, and indicate the respective variation extents of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 .
- a variation is reduced, that is, an area of the region surrounded by the outer circumferential line becomes smaller as a value of the variation extent becomes greater (closer to 100).
- a time-series condition for each of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 is written, and, for example, the time-series image A 1 indicated with the solid line may indicate data in a period from the present to 7 days ago.
- the second region image (an image related to an arrival position) BB corresponding to the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user 2 may also be displayed as a comparison target on the display section 25 .
- the second region image BB which is, for example, a thick-color portion (in FIG. 41 , a dark black portion) on which data concentrates is displayed by shading of plots on the background of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 .
- the user 2 can check a movement trajectory of a ball hit by the user through image display and can thus easily understand the movement trajectory. Since the target region TA 1 indicating a target arrival position region is displayed in the coordinate system, the user 2 can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent there is a gap between the ability (level) of the user and the target with respect to a ball arrival position, or to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to the target in addition to a variation.
- the first region image AA for the user 2 , and the second region image BB corresponding to the first region image AA in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user 2 are displayed together in the coordinate system having two indexes as axes on the display section 25 . Consequently, the user 2 can easily compare the first region image AA for the user 2 with the second region image BB related to swings performed by another person, and can thus objectively perform evaluation.
- a user who is different from the user 2 is set as a person who has to be a model, for example, a leader or a pro golfer, it is possible to objectively evaluate a difference between the ability of the user 2 and the ability of the leader or the pro golfer.
- the ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC 1 and FC 2 may also be displayed as images indicating regions for each time series or as regions indicating the variation extents.
- Region display here indicates that line segments (corresponding to the ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC 1 and FC 2 illustrated in FIG. 41 ) indicating a plurality of ball flight trajectories related to a plurality of swings are displayed to overlap each other, and a set of the line segments indicating the ball flight trajectories is displayed. Through this display, it is possible to further check a variation in relation to the ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC 1 and FC 2 .
- FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating Modification Example 1 related to another display of an analysis result.
- the user 2 can visually understand whether or not the user is directed toward a target related to a swing at first sight.
- the display of the target regions may be changed, for example, by tapping a position of a desired target region on a screen.
- FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating Modification Example 2 related to another display method of an analysis result, and, in the display method of Modification Example 2, a coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions by reference lines DL 1 and DL 2 .
- the display method of the Modification Example 2 is the same as in the display example 3 except for the reference lines DL 1 and DL 2 , and thus description thereof will be omitted.
- the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions by the reference lines DL 1 and DL 2 provided along the longitudinal axis and the transverse axis.
- the coordinate system is divided into four regions including a first quadrant Z 1 , a second quadrant Z 2 , a third quadrant Z 3 , and a fourth quadrant Z 4 by reference lines DL 1 and DL 2 .
- a proportion of plot points of the second region image BB occupying each of the separate four regions (the first quadrant Z 1 , the second quadrant Z 2 , the third quadrant Z 3 , and the fourth quadrant Z 4 ) is displayed in a percentage (%) in a legend region (checkbox) 96 d 3 .
- a proportion of the second region image BB which is included in each of the regions (the first quadrant Z 1 , the second quadrant Z 2 , the third quadrant Z 3 , and the fourth quadrant Z 4 ) into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is related to estimation information obtained by estimating a ball arrival position corresponding to each of a plurality of swings performed by another user, that is, a proportion related to estimation information regarding a ball arrival position for each swing is displayed. Consequently, the user 2 can understand a swing state of another person.
- the user 2 can objectively check biasing regarding ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings performed by the user while performing comparison with swings performed by another person.
- the coordinate system may be divided into four regions such as the first quadrant Z 1 , the second quadrant Z 2 , the third quadrant Z 3 , and the fourth quadrant Z 4 by the reference lines DL 1 and DL 2 , and a proportion of plot points of the time-series images A 1 , A 2 and A 3 (first analysis information) which are analysis data for the user 2 in each of the regions (the first quadrant Z 1 , the second quadrant Z 2 , the third quadrant Z 3 , and the fourth quadrant Z 4 ) may be displayed in a percentage (%) in the legend region (checkbox) 96 d 3 .
- the swing analysis portion 211 detects impact by using the square root of the square sum as shown in Equation (2) as a combined value of three-axis angular velocities measured by the sensor unit, but, as a combined value of three-axis angular velocities, for example, a square sum of three-axis angular velocities, a sum or an average of three-axis angular velocities, or the product of three-axis angular velocities may be used.
- a combined value of three-axis accelerations such as a square sum or a square root of three-axis accelerations, a sum or an average value of three-axis accelerations, or the product of three-axis accelerations may be used.
- the score calculation portion 311 may calculate scores and a total score of a plurality of items on the basis of the selected swing analysis data 248 without displaying the input data editing screen as illustrated in FIG. 8 .
- the score calculation portion 311 may calculate scores and a total score of a plurality of items on the basis of input data (for example, all indexes are manually input data) in which all values of indexes indicating features of a swing are pseudo-values.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates scores of seven items including the “V zone” item, the “rotation” item, the “impact” item, the “down blow” or “upper blow” item, the “efficiency (swing efficiency)” item, the “head speed” item, and the “hands-up” item, but may not calculate scores of some of the items, and may calculate scores of other items. In the present embodiment, the score calculation portion 311 calculates a total score, but may not calculate a total score.
- the score calculation portion 311 calculates scores of a plurality of items by using various score tables, but may use equations instead of the score tables.
- the score calculation portion 311 may also function as the swing analysis portion 211 , and may perform a swing diagnosis process (a swing analysis process and a score calculation process) including the swing analysis process on the basis of measured data (an output signal from an inertial sensor) from the sensor unit 10 , which is data regarding a swing.
- a swing diagnosis process a swing analysis process and a score calculation process
- measured data an output signal from an inertial sensor
- the concept of the V zone (a region interposed between the shaft plane and the Hogan plane) is introduced in order to define the regions A, B, C, D and E in which the head 3 a is included.
- the V zone is a region interposed between the first virtual plane along the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 and the second virtual plane passing through the vicinity of the shoulder of the user 2 (refer to FIG. 44A ).
- the first virtual plane is, for example, a so-called shaft plane specified by a first axis along a target hit ball direction and a second axis along the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3 before a swing is started.
- the second virtual plane is, for example, a so-called Hogan plane which includes the first axis, and forms a predetermined angle with the first virtual plane.
- the second virtual plane may be a virtual plane (including both of a virtual plane parallel to the first virtual plane and a virtual plane along the first virtual plane) which is parallel to the first virtual plane.
- a parallel virtual plane may be referred to as a “shoulder plane” (refer to FIG. 44B ).
- the second virtual plane may be calculated on the basis of both of the first virtual plane and the physical information 244 of the user 2 , and a plane having a predetermined relationship with the first virtual plane may be the second virtual plane.
- a method of defining the first virtual plane and the second virtual plane is not limited thereto, and, for example, virtual planes as illustrated in FIG. 44C may be used.
- Two virtual planes illustrated in FIG. 44C are virtual planes which are set on the basis of an attitude of the shaft before a swing is started, in which a first plane is a virtual plane passing through the vicinity of the elbow of the user 2 , and a second plane is a virtual plane passing through the vicinity of the knee of the user.
- the first virtual plane and the second virtual plane are not parallel to each other, and intersect each other on a straight line extending in a grip end direction of the golf club 3 , for example.
- comments on diagnosis information based on the first region image AA or a practice method based on the diagnosis information may be displayed along with the first region image AA or the second region image BB displayed as an image on the display section 25 . Since the comments on the diagnosis information or the practice method based on the diagnosis information are displayed, the user 2 can easily understand a swing state, and can thus take appropriate measures to improve a swing or perform efficient practice.
- FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motion analysis system related to a modification example
- FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of a sensor unit and a swing analysis apparatus related to the modification example.
- a swing diagnosis system 1000 as a motion analysis system related to the modification example is configured to include a sensor unit (an example of an inertial sensor) 10 , a user terminal 320 , a customer terminal 350 , and a server 300 as illustrated in FIGS. 45 and 46 .
- the user terminal 320 , the customer terminal 350 , and the server 300 are connected to the network 40 such as the Internet, and can transmit and receive information to and from each other.
- the sensor unit 10 is the same as in the above-described embodiment, and flows of information transmitted and received among the sensor unit 10 , the user terminal 320 , the server 300 , and the customer terminal 350 are the same as illustrated in FIG. 45 .
- a user of the sensor unit 10 is, for example, a purchaser of the sensor unit 10 .
- the sensor unit 10 is attached to, for example, the golf club 3 owned by the user, and is used for a golf swing practice of the user.
- An operator of the user terminal 320 is the same as the user.
- the user terminal 320 is used for the user to operate the sensor unit 10 or to access the server 300 .
- a manager of the customer terminal 350 is a golf goods manufacturer or a golf goods shop dealing in various types of golf clubs (examples of exercise appliances).
- the manufacturer or the shop is a customer to a manager of the server 300 (hereinafter, referred to as a “customer” as appropriate).
- a user visits the manufacturer or the shop in order to purchase a golf club.
- An operator of the customer terminal 350 is an employee of a customer (the manufacturer or the shop).
- the employee is a person (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “fitter”) who allows a user visiting the manufacturer or the shop to try to hit a ball, so as to find a golf club fitted to the user, and prompts the user to purchase the golf club.
- the manager of the server 300 is, for example, a person who made a promise to provide a program or various pieces of information for controlling the sensor unit 10 to the user terminal 320 in advance.
- the manager of the server 300 is also a person who made a promise to provide information to each of a plurality of customers including the customer (that is, the manufacturer or the shop) of the present modification example.
- a user attaches the sensor unit 10 to the golf club 3 owned by the user, and inputs physical information of the user, information regarding the golf club (golf club information), sensor attachment position information, and the like to the user terminal 320 .
- the physical information includes, for example, a height of the user, a length of the arms, a length of the legs, the sex, and other information.
- the golf club information includes, for example, information regarding a manufacturer name of the golf club 3 , a product number, a club number, a club type (a head type and a shaft type), a specification (a length of the shaft, a position of the centroid thereof, a lie angle, a face age, a loft angle, and the like).
- the user performs a measurement starting operation (an operation for causing the sensor unit 10 to start measurement) via the user terminal 320 .
- a measurement starting operation an operation for causing the sensor unit 10 to start measurement
- the user terminal 320 After receiving a notification (for example, a notification using a voice) of giving an instruction for taking an address attitude (a basic attitude before starting a swing) from the user terminal 320 , the user takes an address attitude so that the axis in the longitudinal direction of the shaft of the golf club 3 is perpendicular to a target line (target hit ball direction), and stands still.
- the attitude of the user illustrated in FIG. 2 is the address attitude.
- the use receives a notification (for example, a notification using a voice) of permitting a swing from the user terminal 320 , and then hits the golf ball 4 by performing a swing action.
- a notification for example, a notification using a voice
- the user terminal 320 transmits a measurement starting command to the sensor unit 10 , and the sensor unit 10 starts measurement of three-axis accelerations and three-axis angular velocities and sequentially transmits the measured data to the user terminal 320 . Then, the user terminal 320 analyzes the swing action on the basis of the received measured so as to generate swing analysis data, and transmits the swing analysis data to the server 300 .
- the swing action performed by the user includes an action reaching impact (ball hitting) at which the golf ball 4 is hit through respective states of halfway back at which the shaft of the golf club 3 becomes horizontal during a backswing after starting a swing (backswing), a top at which the swing changes from the backswing to a downswing, and halfway down at which the shaft of the golf club 3 becomes horizontal during the downswing.
- a swing time point date and time
- user ID user identification information
- the sex of the user the golf club information
- the physical information of the user and the sensor attachment position information
- the user visits the shop or the manufacturer who is an owner of the customer terminal 350 in order to examine purchase of a new golf club.
- the fitter accesses the server 300 by operating the customer terminal 350 , and calls a home screen (an input screen of the user ID) which is displayed on the customer terminal 350 .
- the fitter prompts the user to input the user ID of the user visiting the shop or the manufacturer to the customer terminal 350 .
- the user ID is input to the customer terminal 350 , the user ID and a customer ID are transmitted from the customer terminal 350 to the server 300 .
- the customer terminal 350 stores the customer ID in advance.
- the fitter may input the customer ID to the customer terminal 350 .
- the fitter may input the user ID to the customer terminal 350 instead of the user.
- the diagnosis result in the present modification example includes a recommended golf club type (recommended club type) which is recommended to the user by the shop or the manufacturer.
- the recommended club type is expressed by, for example, a combination of a recommended shaft type and a recommended head type.
- the fitter checks the recommended club type displayed on the customer terminal 350 , and picks up one or a plurality of golf clubs included in the recommended club type among a plurality of golf clubs stored in the shop or the manufacturer to which the fitter belongs.
- the fitter allows the user to actually try to hit a ball (swing) with one or a plurality of golf clubs having been picked up, and thus determines whether or not the picked-up golf club is fitted to the user.
- the fitter determines that the picked-up golf club is not fitted to the user, the fitter picks up another golf club type stored in the shop or the manufacturer, and allows the user to try to hit a ball with the golf club. The fitter repeatedly performs this, and thus searches for a golf club fitted to the user.
- the fitter inputs the club type of purchased golf club (purchased club type) to the customer terminal 350 .
- the input of fitting data performed by the fitter is performed, for example, by selecting (touching or clicking) a region in which the purchase d club type is included.
- fitting data indicating the recommended club type and the purchased club type is transmitted from the customer terminal 350 to the server 300 .
- the accuracy of swing diagnosis in the server 300 may be regarded to be high (the recommended club type is fitted to the user), and, in a case where a difference between the recommended club type and the purchased club type is great, the accuracy of swing diagnosis in the server 300 may be regarded to be low (the recommended club type is not fitted to the user).
- the fitting data transmitted to the server 300 is used for correction (feedback correction) of a diagnosis table (an example of a diagnosis reference) in the server 300 .
- the diagnosis table which is a target of the feedback correction is a diagnosis table dedicated to the customer (the shop or the manufacturer) of the present modification example.
- the diagnosis table an example of a customer diagnosis reference
- the accuracy of swing diagnosis is improved.
- a probability that a recommended club type may be fitted to a user is improved.
- the fitter belonging to the shop or the manufacturer, even a beginner can reduce the time required to find a golf club fitted to a user (the time required for fitting). In this case, the time required for a user to purchase a golf club is also reduced.
- the fitter Even if the fitter is inexperienced, the fitter performs fitting with confidence on the basis of a recommended club type supported by the swing diagnosis system 1000 , and can thus give a user a sense of security.
- fitting data a “combination of the recommended club type and the purchased club type” is used, but, at least one of “review of a fitter”, “pointing-out by a fitter”, “improvements from a fitter”, and the like may be used instead of the “purchased club type” or along with “purchased club type”.
- the server 300 acquires a diagnosis result (recommended club type) for the user and dedicated to the customer on the basis of the swing analysis data of the user and the diagnosis table of the customer stored in the server 300 in advance, and transmits the diagnosis result to the customer terminal 350 .
- a diagnosis result recommended club type
- the server 300 If the fitting data (a combination of the recommended club type and the purchased club type) is received from the customer terminal 350 , the server 300 performs feedback correction on the diagnosis table of the customer so that a difference between the recommended club type and the purchased club type is reduced.
- the server 300 adjusts the intensity of the feedback correction (whether or not the feedback is performed, a shift amount of a boundary position, a timing of the feedback reference numeral, and the like) according to the reliability of the received fitting data.
- the server 300 estimates the reliability of the received fitting data on the basis of the fitting data of the customer or the swing analysis data of the user.
- the swing diagnosis system 1000 may be formed of a manager of the server, a golf goods manufacturer or a golf goods shop which is a customer, and a user visiting the golf goods shop in order to purchase a golf club.
- FIG. 47 is a perspective view illustrating an example of a head mounted display (HMD) as a motion analysis apparatus.
- a head mounted display (HMD) 500 includes a spectacle main body 501 mounted on the head of the user 2 .
- the spectacle main body 501 is provided with a display section 502 .
- the display section 502 integrates a light beam emitted from an image display unit 503 with a light beam directed toward the eyes of the user 2 , and thus overlaps a virtual image on the image display unit 503 with a real image of the external world viewed from the user 2 .
- the display section 502 is provided with, for example, the image display unit 503 such as an liquid crystal display (LCD), a first beam splitter 504 , a second beam splitter 505 , a first concave reflection mirror 506 , a second concave reflection mirror 507 , a shutter 508 , and a convex lens 509 .
- the image display unit 503 such as an liquid crystal display (LCD), a first beam splitter 504 , a second beam splitter 505 , a first concave reflection mirror 506 , a second concave reflection mirror 507 , a shutter 508 , and a convex lens 509 .
- the first beam splitter 504 is disposed on the front side of the left eye of the user 2 , and partially transmits and partially reflects light emitted from the image display unit 503 .
- the second beam splitter 505 is disposed on the front side of the right eye of the user 2 , and partially transmits and partially reflects light which is partially transmitted from the first beam splitter 504 .
- the first concave reflection mirror 506 which is disposed in front of the first beam splitter 504 , partially reflects the partially reflected light from the first beam splitter 504 so as to transmit the light through the first beam splitter 504 , and thus guides the light to the left eye of the user 2 .
- the second concave reflection mirror 507 which is disposed in front of the second beam splitter 505 , partially reflects the partially reflected light from the second beam splitter 505 so as to transmit the light through the second beam splitter 505 , and thus guides the light to the right eye of the user 2 .
- the convex lens 509 guides partially transmitted light from the second beam splitter 505 to the outside of the head mounted display (HMD) 500 when the shutter 508 is opened.
- the analysis information (refer to FIGS. 35 to 43 ) in a series of swing actions of the user 2 , the swing information such as a swing trajectory (not illustrated) approximating the swing actions, and the like, as described in the display examples, are displayed on the head mounted display (HMD) 500 .
- the display content is the same as in the above-described display examples, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.
- the head mounted display (HMD) 500 since the head mounted display (HMD) is mounted on the head and displays information, the user 2 can understand swing information of the user or attitude (position) information of the hands 2 a without holding the swing analysis apparatus (motion analysis apparatus) 20 including the display section 25 displaying information with the hands.
- the head mounted display (HMD) 500 may have the functions of the swing analysis apparatus 20 and may display swing analysis or swing information based on measured data from the sensor unit 10 , and may be used as a display section displaying image data transmitted from the separate swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the functions of the swing analysis apparatus (motion analysis apparatus) 20 include the processing section 21 (an example of a processing section), the communication section 22 , the operation section 23 , the storage section 24 , the display section 25 , and the sound output section 26 as described above.
- FIG. 48 is a perspective view illustrating an arm mounted motion analysis display apparatus as an example of a wearable apparatus.
- a wearable (arm mounted) analysis display apparatus 600 is mounted on a predetermined part (the wrist in this example) of the user (subject) 2 (refer to FIG. 2 ) and displays swing analysis or swing information based on measured data from the sensor unit 10 (refer to FIG. 2 ).
- the analysis display apparatus 600 includes an apparatus main body 610 which is worn by the user 2 and displays swing analysis information such as swing analysis or attitude information of the hands 2 a (refer to FIG. 2 ) of the user 2 , and a band portion 615 which is attached to the apparatus main body 610 and allows the apparatus main body 610 to be mounted on the user 2 .
- the apparatus main body 610 of the analysis display apparatus 600 is provided with a bottom case 613 on the side mounted on the user 2 , and a top case 611 on an opposite side to the side mounted on the user 2 .
- a bezel 618 is provided on a top side (top case 611 ) of the apparatus main body 610 , and a glass plate 619 as a top plate portion (outer wall) which is disposed inside the bezel 618 and protects inner structures is also provided.
- a pair of band attachment portions 617 which is a connection portion with the band portion 615 are provided on both sides of the bottom case 613 .
- the apparatus main body 610 is provided with a display portion such as a liquid crystal display (LCD 634 ) directly under the glass plate 619 .
- the user 2 can view swing analysis information, attitude information of the hands 2 a of the user 2 , or the like, displayed on the liquid crystal display (LCD 634 ) via the glass plate 619 .
- the apparatus main body 610 may include the processing section 21 , the communication section 22 , the operation section 23 , the storage section 24 , the display section 25 , and the sound output section 26 in the same manner as the swing analysis apparatus 20 described with reference to FIG. 10 .
- the display section 25 corresponds to a display portion such as the liquid crystal display (LCD 634 ) in this example.
- the analysis information (refer to FIGS. 35 to 43 ) in a series of swing actions of the user 2 , the swing information such as a swing trajectory (not illustrated) approximating the swing actions, and the like, as described in the display examples, are displayed on the display portion of the liquid crystal, display (LCD 634 ).
- the display (presentation) content is the same as in the above-described display examples, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.
- a text image representing a swing type of the user 2 or a text image representing advice (practice method or the like) suitable for the swing type of the user 2 may be displayed on the display portion of the liquid crystal display (LCD 634 ).
- Moving images as video pictures may be displayed on the display portion of the liquid crystal display (LCD 634 ).
- the top plate portion of the apparatus main body 610 is implemented by the glass plate 619
- the top plate portion may be formed by using materials other than glass, such as transparent plastic, as long as a member is transparent so as to allow the LCD 634 to be viewed, and has the rigidity of being capable of protecting constituent elements included in the top case 611 and the bottom case 613 , such as the LCD 634 .
- a configuration example in which the bezel 618 is provided has been described, but the bezel 618 may not be provided.
- analysis display apparatus 600 since analysis display apparatus is mounted on the arm and displays information, the user 2 can understand swing information of the user or attitude (position) information of the hands 2 a without holding the display portion (liquid crystal display (LCD 634 )) displaying information with the hands.
- display portion liquid crystal display (LCD 634 )
- the wearable (arm mounted) analysis display apparatus 600 may have the functions of the swing analysis apparatus 20 and may display swing analysis or swing information based measured data from the sensor unit 10 , and may be used as a display section displaying image data transmitted from the separate swing analysis apparatus 20 .
- the functions of the swing analysis apparatus (motion analysis apparatus) 20 include the processing section 21 (an example of a processing section), the communication section 22 , the operation section 23 , the storage section 24 , the display section 25 , and the sound output section 26 , as described in the swing analysis apparatus 20 of the above-described embodiment.
- the invention includes substantially the same configuration (for example, a configuration in which functions, methods, and results are the same, or a configuration in which objects and effects are the same) as the configuration described in the embodiment.
- the invention includes a configuration in which an inessential part of the configuration described in the embodiment is replaced with another part.
- the invention includes a configuration which achieves the same operation and effect or a configuration capable of achieving the same object as in the configuration described in the embodiment.
- the invention includes a configuration in which a well-known technique is added to the configuration described in the embodiment.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Educational Administration (AREA)
- Educational Technology (AREA)
- Entrepreneurship & Innovation (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
- Measurement Of The Respiration, Hearing Ability, Form, And Blood Characteristics Of Living Organisms (AREA)
- User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
Abstract
A display method includes generating first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user, estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information, and displaying a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
Description
- The present invention relates to a display method, a swing analysis apparatus, a swing analysis system, a swing analysis program, and a recording medium.
- In the related art, there is a technique in which a swing trajectory of a golf club, a racket, or a bat as an exercise appliance in sports such as golf, tennis, or baseball is analyzed, and an athletic ability of a player is enhanced by improving a swing trajectory. As an example of such a technique, for example, JP-A-2015-123206 discloses a technique in which a swing is imaged with a video camera, and analysis is performed by using captured moving images. For example, JP-A-2014-64125 discloses a technique in which a swing is analyzed on the basis of multi-motion images obtained by superimposing and combining a plurality of continuously captured images of the swing. For example, JP-A-2014-100341 discloses a technique in which an impact timing, that is, a ball hitting timing during a swing is detected by using a motion sensor, and then the swing is analyzed.
- However, in the techniques disclosed in JP-A-2015-123206 and JP-A-2014-64125, a size of a device capturing moving images or consecutive images (multi-motion images) is large, and thus there is a problem in that it is hard for a user to easily measure a swing. On the other hand, in the technique disclosed in JP-A-2014-100341, swing analysis can be easily performed by using a motion sensor attached to an exercise appliance (golf club), but there is a problem in that it is hard for a user to objectively recognize variations in a plurality of swings.
- An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following forms or application examples.
- A display method according to this application example includes generating first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user; estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and displaying a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
- According to the display method of this application example, respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings are estimated on the basis of first analysis information which is generated on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the estimated respective ball arrival positions. Since such display is performed, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
- According to this application example, it is possible to easily obtain information for estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings as image information on the basis of a carry and a relative face angle. Consequently, the user can recognize more efficiently swing ability (level).
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that a predetermined target region is displayed in the coordinate system.
- According to this application example, since the predetermined target region is displayed in the coordinate system, a user can specifically and objectively recognize to what extent there is a gap with the target with respect to a ball arrival position, or to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to the target in addition to a variation.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that the first region image includes a plurality of time-series images, and the plurality of time-series images are displayed in the coordinate system.
- According to this application example, the plurality of time-series images included in the first region image are displayed in the coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes. Since such display is performed, a user can recognize transition of the first analysis information related to a plurality of swings as the plurality of time-series images. Consequently, the user can objectively recognize to what extent the present ability (level) of the user related to a plurality of swings is improved in addition to a variation.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that a display aspect differs for each of the time-series images.
- According to this application example, since the respective time-series images are displayed in different display aspects (for example, colors or the types of lines) in the first region image, the user can easily identify at first sight a transition state from the past to the present with respect to the ability (level) related to a plurality of swings.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that an area of the first region image is the magnitude corresponding to variations between the plurality of pieces of data related to the plurality of swings.
- According to this application example, the user can easily and objectively check variations between a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings at first sight on the basis of a size (magnitude) of the area of the first region image.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that a second region image corresponding to the first region image in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user is displayed in the coordinate system along with the first region image.
- According to this application example, since the second region image corresponding to the first region image in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user is displayed in the coordinate system, the user can perform comparison with the second region image related to swings performed by another person, and can thus perform more objective evaluation.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and a proportion of the second region image occupying each of the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
- According to this application example, a proportion of the second region image which is included in each of the regions into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is obtained by estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings, that is, a proportion related to a ball arrival position estimated for each swing is displayed. Consequently, the user can understand a swing state of another person. The user can objectively check biasing or the like in ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings performed by the user while performing comparison with swings performed by another person.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and a proportion of the first region image occupying each of the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
- According to this application example, a proportion of the first region image which is included in each of the regions into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is obtained by estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings, that is, a proportion related to a ball arrival position estimated for each swing performed by the user is displayed. The user can objectively check biasing or the like in ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that a ball flight trajectory from a ball shooting position to an arrival position is displayed in the coordinate system.
- According to this application example, the user can check a flight trajectory (movement trajectory) of a ball hit by the user through image display, and can thus easily understand the flight trajectory.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that the first analysis information includes information related to at least one of impact, a V zone, efficiency, rotation, a head speed, hands-up, and a down blow.
- According to this application example, the user can obtain information related to at least one of impact, a V zone, efficiency, rotation, a head speed, hands-up, and a down blow as analysis data of an important index indicating ability (level) regarding a plurality of swings and detailed data. Consequently, the user can more efficiently understand swing ability.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that diagnosis information is displayed on the basis of the first region image.
- According to this application example, since diagnosis information based on the first region image is displayed, the user can easily understand a swing state, and can thus take appropriate measures to improve a swing.
- In the display method of the application example, it is preferable that a practice method is displayed on the basis of the diagnosis information.
- According to this application example, a practice method based on diagnosis information is displayed, and thus the user can perform an efficient practice.
- A swing analysis apparatus according to this application example includes an analysis section that generates first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user; a processing section that estimates respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and a display section that displays a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
- According to the swing analysis apparatus of this application example, the processing section estimates respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings on the basis of first analysis information which is generated by the analysis section on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective estimated ball arrival positions on the display section. Since such display is performed, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
- According to this application example, it is possible to easily obtain information for estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings as image information on the basis of a carry and a relative face angle. Consequently, the user can recognize more efficiently swing ability (level).
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that a predetermined target region is displayed in the coordinate system.
- According to this application example, since, the predetermined target region is displayed in the coordinate system, a user can objectively recognize to what extent there is a gap with the target with respect to a ball arrival position, or to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to the target in addition to a variation.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that the first region image includes a plurality of time-series images, and the plurality of time-series images are displayed in the coordinate system.
- According to this application example, the plurality of time-series images included in the first region image are displayed together in the coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes. Since such display is performed, a user can recognize transition of the first analysis information related to a plurality of swings as the plurality of time-series images. Consequently, the user can specifically and objectively recognize to what extent the present ability (level) of the user related to a plurality of swings is improved in addition to a variation.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that a display aspect differs for each of the time-series images.
- According to this application example, since the respective time-series images are displayed in different display aspects (for example, colors or the types of lines) in the first region image, the user can easily identify at first sight a transition state from the past to the present with respect to the ability (level) related to a plurality of swings.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that an area of the first region image is the magnitude corresponding to variations between the plurality of pieces of data related to the plurality of swings.
- According to this application example, the user can easily and objectively check variations between a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings at first sight.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that a second region image corresponding to the first region image in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user is displayed in the coordinate system along with the first region image.
- According to this application example, since the second region image corresponding to the first region image in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user is displayed in the coordinate system, the user can perform comparison with the second region image related to swings performed by another person, and can thus perform more objective evaluation.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and a proportion of the second region image occupying each of the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
- According to this application example, a proportion of the second region image which is included in each of the regions into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is obtained by estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings performed by another user, that is, a proportion related to a ball arrival position estimated for each swing is displayed. Consequently, the user can understand a swing state of another person. The user can objectively check biasing or the like in ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings performed by the user while performing comparison with swings performed by another person.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and a proportion of the first region image occupying each of the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
- According to this application example, a proportion of the first region image which is included in each of the regions into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is obtained by estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings, that is, a proportion related to a ball arrival position estimated for each swing performed by the user is displayed. The user can objectively check biasing or the like in ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that a ball flight trajectory from a ball shooting position to an arrival position is displayed in the coordinate system.
- According to this application example, the user can check a flight trajectory (movement trajectory) of a ball hit by the user through image display, and can thus easily understand the flight trajectory.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that the first analysis information includes information related to at least one of impact, a V zone, efficiency, rotation, a head speed, hands-up, and a down blow.
- According to this application example, the user can obtain information related to at least one of impact, a V zone, efficiency, rotation, a head speed, hands-up, and a down blow as analysis data of an important index indicating ability (level) regarding a plurality of swings and detailed data. Consequently, the user can more efficiently understand swing ability.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that diagnosis information is displayed on the basis of the first region image.
- According to this application example, since diagnosis information based on the first region image is displayed, the user can easily understand a swing state, and can thus take appropriate measures to improve a swing.
- In the swing analysis apparatus of the application example, it is preferable that a practice method is displayed on the basis of the diagnosis information.
- According to this application example, a practice method based on diagnosis information is displayed, and thus the user can perform an efficient practice.
- A swing analysis system according to this application example includes the swing analysis apparatus according to any one of the application examples; and an inertial sensor.
- According to the swing analysis system of this application example, the processing section estimates respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings on the basis of first analysis information which is generated by the analysis section on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the estimated respective ball arrival positions on the display section. Since such display is performed on the display section, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation. Therefore, by using the swing analysis system, the user can perform highly accurate practice.
- A swing analysis program according to this application example causes a computer to execute generating first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user; estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and displaying a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
- According to the swing analysis program of this application example, respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings are estimated on the basis of first analysis information which is generated on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the estimated respective ball arrival positions. Since such display is performed, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation.
- In the swing analysis program of the application example, it is preferable that the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
- According to this application example, it is possible to easily obtain information for estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings as image information on the basis of a carry and a relative face angle. Consequently, the user can recognize more efficiently swing ability (level).
- A recording medium according to this application example stores a program causing a computer to execute generating first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user; estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and displaying a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
- According to the recording medium of this application example, by executing a computer on the basis of the recorded program, respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings are estimated on the basis of first analysis information which is generated on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and a first region image is displayed in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the estimated respective ball arrival positions. Since such display is performed, the user can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings in addition to a variation.
- In the recording medium of the application example, it is preferable that the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
- According to this application example, it is possible to easily obtain information for estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings as image information on the basis of a carry and a relative face angle. Consequently, the user can recognize more efficiently swing ability (level).
- The invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, wherein like numbers reference like elements.
-
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motion analysis system of the present embodiment. -
FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a sensor unit and a swing analysis apparatus. -
FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating examples of a position at which and a direction in which the sensor unit is attached. -
FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating procedures of actions performed by a user until the user hits a ball. -
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of an input screen of physical information and golf club information. -
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a swing action. -
FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a selection screen of swing analysis data. -
FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of an editing screen of input data which is a swing diagnosis target. -
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a swing diagnosis screen. -
FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating configuration examples of the sensor unit and a swing analysis apparatus. -
FIG. 11 is a plan view in which a golf club and the sensor unit are viewed from a negative side of an X axis during standing still of the user. -
FIG. 12 is a graph illustrating examples of temporal changes of three-axis angular velocities. -
FIG. 13 is a graph illustrating a temporal change of a combined value of the three-axis angular velocities. -
FIG. 14 is a graph illustrating a temporal change of a derivative of the combined value. -
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a shaft plane and a Hogan plane. -
FIG. 16 is a view in which a sectional view of the shaft plane which is cut in a YZ plane is viewed from the negative side of the X axis. -
FIG. 17 is a view in which a sectional view of the Hogan plane which is cut in the YZ plane is viewed from the negative side of the X axis. -
FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a face angle and a club path (incidence angle). -
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporal change of a shaft axis rotation angle from swing starting (backswing starting) to impact. -
FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporal change of a speed of a grip in a downswing. -
FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining definition of an attack angle (first angle) of a ball hitting portion at impact. -
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a swing analysis process (swing analysis method). -
FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a swing diagnosis apparatus. -
FIG. 24A is a diagram illustrating relationships among the shaft plane and the Hogan plane, and a plurality of regions. -
FIG. 24B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the shaft plane, the Hogan plane, and a user's attitude. -
FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a V zone score table. -
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rotation score table. -
FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of an impact score table. -
FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of a down blow score table. -
FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of an upper blow score table. -
FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a swing efficiency score table. -
FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a carry score table. -
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a process performed by the swing analysis apparatus in relation to a swing diagnosis process. -
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of the swing diagnosis process (swing diagnosis method). -
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a process of calculating scores and a total score of a plurality of items. -
FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball arrival position as a display example 1. -
FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball a ball arrival position and a target region as a display example 2. -
FIG. 37 is a histogram related to a “shooting direction” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position. -
FIG. 38 is a histogram related to “curving” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position. -
FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining display examples illustrating a swing trajectory of a club head of a right-handed subject and a swing trajectory of a club head of a left-handed subject. -
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a display example in which one of swing trajectories having mirror image shapes due to a difference between dominant hands of subjects is inverted to overlap the other which is not inverted. -
FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a ball arrival position and a ball flight line (ball flight trajectory) as a display example 3. -
FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating Modification Example 1 related to another display method of an analysis result. -
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating Modification Example 2 related to another display method of an analysis result. -
FIG. 44A is a diagram for explaining a V zone (a first virtual plane and a second virtual plane). -
FIG. 44B is a diagram illustrating a modification example of the first virtual plane and the second virtual plane. -
FIG. 44C is a diagram illustrating another modification example of the first virtual plane and the second virtual plane. -
FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motion analysis system related to a modification example. -
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of a sensor unit and a swing analysis apparatus related to a modification example. -
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the motion analysis apparatus is configured by using a head mounted display. -
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the motion analysis apparatus is configured by using a wrist type terminal. - Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The embodiments described below are not intended to improperly limit the content of the invention disclosed in the appended claims. In addition, all constituent elements described below are not essential constituent elements of the invention.
- Hereinafter, analysis of a golf swing will be described as an example of motion analysis.
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motion analysis system of the present embodiment. As illustrated inFIG. 1 , a motion analysis system (swing analysis system) 1 of the present embodiment is configured to include a sensor unit (an example of an inertial sensor) 10, and a swing analysis apparatus (an example of a motion analysis apparatus) 20. Communication between thesensor unit 10 and theswing analysis apparatus 20 may be wireless communication, and may be wired communication. As illustrated inFIG. 2 , theswing analysis apparatus 20 is implemented by various information terminals (client terminals) including not only apersonal computer 20 a, but also aportable apparatus 20 b such as a smart phone or a tablet PC, or a wearable terminal such as head mounted display (HMD) or a wrist apparatus. - The motion analysis system (swing analysis system) 1 may be configured to include a
swing diagnosis apparatus 30 separately from theswing analysis apparatus 20. However, theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 may be included in theswing analysis apparatus 20. Theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 may be implemented by a server which processes a request from theswing analysis apparatus 20. Theswing analysis apparatus 20 and theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 may be connected to each other via anetwork 40. Thenetwork 40 may be a wide area network (WAN) such as the Internet, and may be a local area network (LAN). Theswing analysis apparatus 20 and theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 may communicate with each other through, for example, near field communication or wired communication, without using thenetwork 40. - As illustrated in
FIG. 2 , thesensor unit 10 can measure, for example, acceleration in each axial direction of three axes orthogonal to each other and, for example, angular velocity about each of the three axes orthogonal to each other, and is attached to, for example, agolf club 3 as an exercise appliance. - As illustrated in
FIG. 3 , thesensor unit 10 is attached to the golf club 3 (an example of an exercise appliance) so as to match three detection axes (an x axis, a y axis, and a z axis) intersecting (ideally, orthogonal to) each other. InFIG. 3 , thesensor unit 10 is attached to a part of a shaft so that, for example, the y axis matches a longitudinal direction of the shaft of the golf club 3 (a longitudinal direction of the golf club 3), and, for example, the x axis matches a target direction of a hit ball (target hitting direction). Preferably, thesensor unit 10 is attached to a position close to a grip to which impact during ball hitting is hardly forwarded and a centrifugal force is not applied during a swing. The shaft is a shaft portion other than a head (ball hitting portion) 3 a of thegolf club 3 and also includes the grip. However, thesensor unit 10 may be attached to a part (for example, the hand or a glove) of auser 2, and may be attached to an accessory such as a wristwatch. - The
user 2 performs a swing action for hitting agolf ball 4 or a swing action through a practice swing according to predefined procedures.FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating procedures of actions performed by theuser 2 until the user hits the ball. As illustrated inFIG. 4 , first, theuser 2 performs an input operation of physical information of theuser 2, information (golf club information) regarding thegolf club 3 used by theuser 2, and the like via the swing analysis apparatus 20 (step S1). -
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of an input screen of physical information and golf club information, displayed on a display section 25 (refer toFIG. 10 ) of theswing analysis apparatus 20. In step S1 inFIG. 4 , theuser 2 inputs physical information such as a height, sex, age, and country, and inputs golf club information such as a club length (a length of the shaft), and a club number on the input screen illustrated inFIG. 5 . Information included in the physical information is not limited thereto, and, the physical information may include, for example, at least one of information regarding a length of the arms and a length of the legs instead of or along with the height. Similarly, information included in the golf club information is not limited thereto, and, for example, the golf club information may not include at least one of information regarding the club length and the club number, and may include other information. - Next, the
user 2 performs a measurement starting operation (an operation for starting measurement in the sensor unit 10) via the swing analysis apparatus 20 (step S2). After receiving a notification (for example, a notification using a voice) of giving an instruction for taking an address attitude (a basic attitude before starting a swing) from the swing analysis apparatus 20 (Y in step S3), theuser 2 takes an address attitude so that the axis in the longitudinal direction of the shaft of thegolf club 3 is perpendicular to a target line (target hit ball direction), and stands still (step S4). Next, theuser 2 receives a notification (for example, a notification using a voice) of permitting a swing from the swing analysis apparatus 20 (Y in step S5), and then hits thegolf ball 4 by performing a swing action (step S6). The present embodiment is not necessarily limited to ball hitting, and is also applicable to a practice swing, and may have a function of detecting a timing corresponding to ball hitting. - If the
user 2 performs the measurement starting operation in step S2 inFIG. 4 , theswing analysis apparatus 20 transmits a measurement starting command to thesensor unit 10, and thesensor unit 10 receives the measurement starting command and starts measurement of three-axis accelerations and three-axis angular velocities. Thesensor unit 10 measures three-axis accelerations and three-axis angular velocities in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 ms), and sequentially transmits the measured data to theswing analysis apparatus 20. - The
swing analysis apparatus 20 notifies theuser 2 of permission of swing starting, shown in step S5 inFIG. 4 , and then analyzes the swing action (step S6 inFIG. 4 ) in which theuser 2 has hit the ball by using thegolf club 3 on the basis of measured data from thesensor unit 10. - As illustrated in
FIG. 6 , the swing action performed by theuser 2 in step S6 inFIG. 4 includes an action reaching impact (ball hitting) at which thegolf ball 4 is hit from an address attitude (standing still state) through respective states of halfway back at which the shaft of thegolf club 3 becomes horizontal during a backswing after starting a swing (backswing), a top at which the swing changes from the backswing to a downswing, and halfway down at which the shaft of thegolf club 3 becomes horizontal during the downswing. Theswing analysis apparatus 20 generates swing analysis data including information regarding a time point (date and time) at which the swing is performed, identification information or the sex of theuser 2, the type ofgolf club 3, and an analysis result of the swing action, and transmits the swing analysis data to theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 via a network 40 (refer toFIG. 1 ). - The
swing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the swing analysis data transmitted by theswing analysis apparatus 20 via thenetwork 40, and preserves the swing analysis data. Therefore, when theuser 2 performs a swing action according to the procedures illustrated inFIG. 4 , the swing analysis data generated by theswing analysis apparatus 20 is preserved in theswing diagnosis apparatus 30, and thus a swing analysis data list is built. - In the present embodiment, if the
user 2 activates a swing diagnosis application via an operation section 23 (refer toFIG. 10 ) of theswing analysis apparatus 20, theswing analysis apparatus 20 performs communication with theswing diagnosis apparatus 30, and, for example, a selection screen of swing analysis data as illustrated inFIG. 7 is displayed on thedisplay section 25 of theswing analysis apparatus 20. The selection screen includes a time point (date and time), the type of golf club which has been used, and some index values as analysis results of a swing, with respect to each item of swing analysis data regarding theuser 2 included in the swing analysis data list preserved in theswing diagnosis apparatus 30. - A checkbox correlated with each item of swing analysis data is located at a left end of the selection screen illustrated in
FIG. 7 , and theuser 2 checks any one of the checkboxes by operating theswing analysis apparatus 20, and then presses an OK button located on a lower part of the selection screen. Consequently, theswing analysis apparatus 20 performs communication with theswing diagnosis apparatus 30, and, thus, for example, an editing screen of input data which is a swing diagnosis target, as illustrated inFIG. 8 , is displayed on thedisplay section 25 of theswing analysis apparatus 20, with respect to the swing analysis data correlated with the checked checkbox on the selection screen illustrated inFIG. 7 . - The input data editing screen illustrated in
FIG. 8 includes values obtained on the basis of the selected swing analysis data as initial values with respect to the sex, the type of golf club (either of a driver or an iron), and each index of a swing. Meanings or calculation methods of the respective indexes (a region in which a position of ahead 3 a at halfway back is included, a region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down is included, a face angle, a club path (incidence angle), a shaft axis rotation angle at top, a head speed, a grip deceleration ratio, and a grip deceleration time ratio) included in the selection screen illustrated inFIG. 7 will be described later. - The input data formed of the sex, the type of golf club, and the respective index values in the input data editing screen illustrated in
FIG. 8 can be edited. Theuser 2 does not edit the input data or edits the input data via the operation section 23 (refer toFIG. 10 ) of theswing analysis apparatus 20, and then presses a diagnosis starting button located on a lower part of the input data editing screen. Consequently, theswing analysis apparatus 20 transmits the input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button being pressed to theswing diagnosis apparatus 30. - The
swing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the input data, and performs calculation of levels (first analysis information) of a plurality of items by using the input data. For example, theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 may calculate a level of each of five items such as a “V zone”, “rotation”, “impact”, a “down blow” or an “upper blow”, and “swing efficiency (efficiency)” illustrated in the radar chart ofFIG. 9 , as 5 points maximum. Meanings or calculation methods of the five items will be described later. Theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 may calculate a total score of a swing by using the respective levels of the five items. Theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 transmits information regarding the calculated levels and total score of the plurality of items to theswing analysis apparatus 20. The “levels” may be represented by, for example, “1, 2, 3, . . . ”, “A, B, C, . . . ”, “O, Δ, X, . . . ”, and may be represented by scores. The levels (first analysis information) calculated by theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 may include information related to at least one of seven items as a result of adding items such as a “head speed” and “hands-up” to the five items such as the “V zone”, the “rotation”, the “impact”, the “down blow” or the “upper blow”, and the “swing efficiency (efficiency)”. - The
swing analysis apparatus 20 receives the information regarding levels and total score of the plurality of items, and displays, for example, a swing diagnosis screen as illustrated inFIG. 9 on thedisplay section 25. The swing diagnosis screen illustrated inFIG. 9 includes input data information on a left part thereof. The input data information is input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button being pressed in the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 , that is, data information used for diagnosis of the swing (that is, calculation of the levels and the total score of the five items) in theswing diagnosis apparatus 30. The swing diagnosis screen illustrated inFIG. 9 includes a radar chart indicating scores as the levels of the five items on the central part thereof, and includes information regarding the total score on a right part thereof. - The
user 2 can understand levels and a total score of the plurality of items as diagnosis results for the input data on the left part on the basis of the swing diagnosis screen illustrated inFIG. 9 . Particularly, if theuser 2 presses the diagnosis starting button without editing the input data on the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 , the user can understand a strong point or a weak point in the user's swing on the basis of the swing diagnosis screen illustrated inFIG. 9 . On the other hand, if theuser 2 edits the input data and presses the diagnosis starting button on the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 , the user can understand which index is improved to what extent in order to overcome the weak point. Hereinafter, a description will be made of an example in which “levels” of a plurality of items are represented by “scores”, but, needless to say, the example can be easily replaced with an example of the levels being expressed by “1, 2, 3, . . . ”, “A, B, C, . . . ”, “O, Δ, X, . . . ”, or the like. - The
swing analysis apparatus 20 receives information regarding levels and a total score of the plurality of items related to a plurality of swings, generates first analysis information related to a ball on the basis of such a plurality of pieces of information (data), and estimates a ball arrival position corresponding to each of the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information. A first region image AA including a plurality of time-series images A1, A2 and A3 is displayed in a coordinate system which will be described later inFIG. 36 and has at least two indexes as axes, on the basis of each estimated ball arrival position. Theswing analysis apparatus 20 displays the plurality of time-series images A1, A2 and A3 together in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes. Here, each of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 is a set of ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings, and indicates variations among the ball arrival positions in each of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3. As illustrated inFIG. 35 , a single time-series image A1 may be displayed as variations among ball arrival positions respectively corresponding to a plurality of swings in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes. - Since the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 are displayed, the
user 2 can specifically and objectively recognize variations among a plurality of ball arrival positions (estimated positions) corresponding to a plurality of swings, that is, the extent of the present ability (level) of the user related to a plurality of ball arrival positions (estimated positions) in a plurality of swings in addition to variations. -
FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating configuration examples of thesensor unit 10 and theswing analysis apparatus 20. As illustrated inFIG. 10 , in the present embodiment, thesensor unit 10 is configured to include anacceleration sensor 12, anangular velocity sensor 14, asignal processing section 16, and acommunication section 18. However, thesensor unit 10 may have a configuration in which some of the constituent elements are deleted or changed as appropriate, or may have a configuration in which other constituent elements are added thereto. - The
acceleration sensor 12 measures respective accelerations in three axial directions which intersect (ideally, orthogonal to) each other, and outputs digital signals (acceleration data) corresponding to magnitudes and directions of the measured three-axis accelerations. - The
angular velocity sensor 14 measures respective angular velocities in three axial directions which intersect (ideally, orthogonal to) each other, and outputs digital signals (angular velocity data) corresponding to magnitudes and directions of the measured three-axis angular velocities. - The
signal processing section 16 receives the acceleration data and the angular velocity data from theacceleration sensor 12 and theangular velocity sensor 14, respectively, adds time information thereto, stores the data in a storage portion (not illustrated), adds time information to the stored measured data (acceleration data and angular velocity data) so as to generate packet data conforming to a communication format, and outputs the packet data to thecommunication section 18. - Ideally, the
acceleration sensor 12 and theangular velocity sensor 14 are provided in thesensor unit 10 so that the three axes thereof match three axes (an x axis, a y axis, and a z axis) of an orthogonal coordinate system (sensor coordinate system) defined for thesensor unit 10, but, actually, errors occur in installation angles. Therefore, thesignal processing section 16 performs a process of converting the acceleration data and the angular velocity data into data in the xyz coordinate system by using a correction parameter which is calculated in advance according to the installation angle errors. - The
signal processing section 16 may perform a process of correcting the temperatures of theacceleration sensor 12 and theangular velocity sensor 14. Alternatively, theacceleration sensor 12 and theangular velocity sensor 14 may have a temperature correction function. - The
acceleration sensor 12 and theangular velocity sensor 14 may output analog signals, and, in this case, thesignal processing section 16 may A/D convert an output signal from theacceleration sensor 12 and an output signal from theangular velocity sensor 14 so as to generate measured data (acceleration data and angular velocity data), and may generate communication packet data by using the data. - The
communication section 18 performs a process of transmitting packet data received from thesignal processing section 16 to theswing analysis apparatus 20, or a process of receiving a control command from theswing analysis apparatus 20 and sending the control command to thesignal processing section 16. Thesignal processing section 16 performs various processes corresponding to control commands. - As illustrated in
FIG. 10 , in the present embodiment, theswing analysis apparatus 20 is configured to include aprocessing section 21, acommunication section 22, anoperation section 23, astorage section 24, adisplay section 25, asound output section 26, and acommunication section 27. However, theswing analysis apparatus 20 may have a configuration in which some of the constituent elements are deleted or changed as appropriate, or may have a configuration in which other constituent elements are added thereto. - The
communication section 22 performs a process receiving packet data transmitted from thesensor unit 10 and sending the packet data to theprocessing section 21, or a process of transmitting a control command from theprocessing section 21 to thesensor unit 10. - The
operation section 23 performs a process of acquiring operation data from theuser 2 and sending the operation data to theprocessing section 21. Theoperation section 23 may be, for example, a touch panel type display, a button, a key, or a microphone. - The
storage section 24 is constituted of, for example, various IC memories such as a read only memory (ROM), a flash ROM, and a random access memory (RAM), or a recording medium such as a hard disk or a memory card. Thestorage section 24 stores a program for theprocessing section 21 performing various calculation processes or a control process, or various programs or data for realizing application functions. - In the present embodiment, the
storage section 24 stores aswing analysis program 240 which is read by theprocessing section 21 and executes a swing analysis process. Theswing analysis program 240 may be stored in a nonvolatile recording medium (computer readable recording medium) in advance, or theswing analysis program 240 may be received from a server (not illustrated) or theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 by theprocessing section 21 via thenetwork 40, and may be stored in thestorage section 24. - In the present embodiment, the
storage section 24 storesgolf club information 242,physical information 244, sensorattachment position information 246, andswing analysis data 248. For example, theuser 2 may operate theoperation section 23 so as to input specification information regarding the golf club 3 (for example, at least some information such as information regarding a length of the shaft, a position of the centroid thereof, a lie angle, a face age, a loft angle, and the like) from the input screen illustrated inFIG. 5 , and the input specification information may be used as thegolf club information 242. Alternatively, in step S1 inFIG. 4 , theuser 2 may sequentially input type numbers of the golf club 3 (alternatively, selects a type number from a type number list) so that specification information for each type number is stored in thestorage section 24 in advance. In this case, specification information of an input type number may be used as thegolf club information 242. - For example, the
user 2 may input physical information by operating theoperation section 23 from the input screen illustrated inFIG. 5 , and the input physical information may be used as thephysical information 244. For example, in step S1 inFIG. 4 , theuser 2 may input an attachment position of thesensor unit 10 and a distance to the grip end of thegolf club 3 by operating theoperation section 23, and the input distance information may be used as the sensorattachment position information 246. Alternatively, thesensor unit 10 may be attached at a defined predetermined position (for example, a distance of 20 cm from the grip end), and thus information regarding the predetermined position may be stored as the sensorattachment position information 246 in advance. - The
swing analysis data 248 is data including information regarding a swing action analysis result in the processing section 21 (swing analysis portion 211) along with a time point (date and time) at which a swing was performed, identification information or the sex of theuser 2, and the type ofgolf club 3. - The
storage section 24 is used as a work region of theprocessing section 21, and temporarily stores data which is input from theoperation section 23, results of calculation executed by theprocessing section 21 according to various programs, and the like. Thestorage section 24 may store data which is required to be preserved for a long period of time among data items generated through processing of theprocessing section 21. - The
display section 25 displays a processing result in theprocessing section 21 as text, a graph, a table, animation, and other images. Thedisplay section 25 may be, for example, a CRT, an LCD, a touch panel type display, and a head mounted display (HMD). A single touch panel type display may realize functions of theoperation section 23 and thedisplay section 25. - The
display section 25 displays a plurality of time-series images A1, A2 and A3 included in the first region image AA together in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes, for example, as illustrated inFIGS. 35 and 36 which will be described later. As illustrated inFIG. 41 , thedisplay section 25 displays a second region image BB, related to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from theuser 2, corresponding to the first region image AA, together. Detailed description of display examples will be made later, and thus description thereof will be omitted. - Regarding a function of the
operation section 23 in thedisplay section 25, the display content can be switched or enlarged or reduced by touching (screen touching) thedisplay section 25. As mentioned above, designation of the display content is performed on theoperation section 23 of thedisplay section 25, and thus it is possible to directly perform an indication, and also to reliably and easily perform an indication. - The
sound output section 26 outputs a processing result (analysis information) in theprocessing section 21 so as to present the processing result as a sound such as a voice or a buzzer sound. Thesound output section 26 may be, for example, a speaker or a buzzer. - The
communication section 27 performs data communication with a communication section 32 (refer toFIG. 23 ) of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 via thenetwork 40. For example, thecommunication section 27 performs a process of receiving theswing analysis data 248 from theprocessing section 21 after a swing analysis process is completed, and transmitting the swing analysis data to thecommunication section 32 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30. For example, thecommunication section 27 performs a process of receiving information required to display the selection screen illustrated inFIG. 7 from thecommunication section 32 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 and transmitting the information to theprocessing section 21, and a process of receiving selected information on the selection screen illustrated inFIG. 7 from theprocessing section 21 and transmitting the selected information to thecommunication section 32 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30. For example, thecommunication section 27 performs a process of receiving information required to display the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 from thecommunication section 32 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30, and transmitting the information to theprocessing section 21. For example, thecommunication section 27 performs a process of receiving input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button on the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 from theprocessing section 21, and transmitting the input data to thecommunication section 32 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30. For example, thecommunication section 27 performs a process of receiving information (diagnosis result information (scores or a total score of a plurality of items) based on the input data) required to display the swing diagnosis screen illustrated inFIG. 9 from thecommunication section 32 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30, and transmitting the information to theprocessing section 21. - The
processing section 21 performs a process of transmitting a control command to thesensor unit 10 via thecommunication section 22, or various computation processes on data which is received from thesensor unit 10 via thecommunication section 22, according to various programs. Theprocessing section 21 performs a process of reading theswing analysis data 248 from thestorage section 24, and transmitting the swing analysis data to theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 via thecommunication section 27, according to various programs. Theprocessing section 21 may perform a process of transmitting various pieces of information to theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 via thecommunication section 27, and forming first region image data corresponding to the first region image AA (for example, refer to 36) as display data of the first analysis information on the basis of the information received from theswing diagnosis apparatus 30, according to various programs. Theprocessing section 21 performs other various control processes. - By executing the
swing analysis program 240, theprocessing section 21 functions as adata acquisition portion 210, aswing analysis portion 211 as an analysis portion, an imagedata generation portion 212, astorage processing portion 213, adisplay processing portion 214, and a soundoutput processing portion 215. Theprocessing section 21 functions as a computer. - Particularly, in the present embodiment, by executing the
swing analysis program 240, theprocessing section 21 functions as thedata acquisition portion 210, theswing analysis portion 211, the imagedata generation portion 212, thestorage processing portion 213, thedisplay processing portion 214, and the soundoutput processing portion 215, and performs a process (swing analysis process) of analyzing a swing action of theuser 2. - The
data acquisition portion 210 performs a process of receiving packet data which is received from thesensor unit 10 by thecommunication section 22, acquiring time information and measured data in thesensor unit 10 from the received packet data, and sending the time information and the measured data to thestorage processing portion 213. Thedata acquisition portion 210 performs a process of receiving the information required to display the various screens (the respective screens illustrated inFIGS. 7, 8 and 9 ), received from theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 by thecommunication section 27, and transmitting the information to the imagedata generation portion 212. - The
storage processing portion 213 performs read/write processes of various programs or various data for thestorage section 24. Thestorage processing portion 213 performs a process of storing the time information and the measured data received from thedata acquisition portion 210 in thestorage section 24 in correlation with each other, or a process of storing various pieces of information calculated by theswing analysis portion 211, theswing analysis data 248, or the like in thestorage section 24. - The
swing analysis portion 211 as an analysis portion performs a process of analyzing a swing action (a plurality of swings) of theuser 2 by using the measured data (the measured data stored in the storage section 24) output from thesensor unit 10, the data from theoperation section 23, or the like, so as to generate theswing analysis data 248 as first analysis information including a time point (date and time) at which the swing was performed, identification information or the sex of theuser 2, the type ofgolf club 3, and information regarding a swing action analysis result. Particularly, in the present embodiment, theswing analysis portion 211 calculates a value of each index of the swing as at least some of the information regarding the swing action analysis result. Theswing analysis data 248 as the first analysis information includes information regarding at least one of the impact, the V zone, the efficiency (swing efficiency), the rotation, the head speed, the hands-up, and the down blow. By obtaining such information; theuser 2 can more efficiently check swing ability. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate at least one virtual plane as an index of the swing. For example, at least one virtual plane includes a shaft plane SP (first virtual plane) which will be described later, and a Hogan plane HP (second virtual plane) which will be described later forming a predetermined angle with the shaft plane SP, and theswing analysis portion 211 may calculate the “shaft plane SP” and the “Hogan plane HP” as the indexes. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a position of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 at a first timing during the backswing as an index of the swing. For example, the first timing is the time of halfway back, at which the longitudinal direction of thegolf club 3 becomes a direction along the horizontal direction during the backswing, and theswing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “position of thehead 3 a at halfway back” which will be described later as the index. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate a position of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 at a second timing during the downswing as an index of the swing. For example, the second timing is the time of halfway down at which the longitudinal direction of thegolf club 3 becomes a direction along the horizontal direction during the downswing, and theswing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “position of thehead 3 a at halfway down” which will be described later as the index. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on an incidence angle of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 at impact (at ball hitting), as an index of the swing. For example, theswing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “club path (incidence angle) ψ” which will be described later as the index. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on an inclination of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 at impact (at ball hitting) as an index of the swing. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on a speed of the golf club 3 (head 3 a) at impact (at ball hitting) as an index of the swing. For example, theswing analysis portion 211 may calculate the “head speed” which will be described later as the index. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate, as an index of the swing, an index based on a rotation angle about a rotation axis (hereinafter, referred to as about the long axis) of the shaft of thegolf club 3 at a predetermined timing between the time of starting a backswing and the time of impact (at ball hitting) with the longitudinal direction of the shaft as the rotation axis. The rotation angle about the long axis of thegolf club 3 may be an angle by which thegolf club 3 is rotated about the long axis from a reference timing to a predetermined timing. The reference timing may be the time of starting a backswing, and may be the time of address. The predetermined timing may be the time (the time of a top) at which a backswing transitions to a downswing. For example, theswing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top” which will be described later as the index. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on a deceleration amount of the grip of thegolf club 3 during the downswing as an index of the swing. For example, theswing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “grip deceleration ratio RV” which will be described later as the index. The “grip deceleration ratio RV” is also referred to as “natural uncock” or a “natural uncock ratio”. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on a deceleration period of the grip of thegolf club 3 during the downswing as an index of the swing. For example, theswing analysis portion 211 may calculate a “grip deceleration time ratio RT” which will be described later as the index. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate an index based on a deceleration timing of the grip of thegolf club 3 during the downswing as an index of the swing. For example, theswing analysis portion 211 may calculate a timing of natural uncock (“natural uncock timing”) of motion in which the grip side of thegolf club 3 is decelerated, and thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 is accelerated as the index. The timing of natural uncock is an index indicating a switching timing in a state in which energy accumulated in a top swing is released and is thus forwarded to thegolf club 3. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate, as indexes of the swing, an index related to a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back (HWB) and an index related to a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down (HWD) in a region (refer toFIGS. 15 and 17 ) interposed between the shaft plane SP (first virtual plane) and the Hogan plane HP (second virtual plane) called the “V zone”. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate indexes based on a lie angle at ball hitting and a lie angle at address in thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 as indexes of the swing. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate indexes based on a “face angle” and an “attack angle” in thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 as indexes of the swing. - However, the
swing analysis portion 211 may not calculate values of some of the indexes, and may calculate values of other indexes, as appropriate. - The image
data generation portion 212 performs a process of generating image data corresponding to an image displayed on thedisplay section 25. For example, the imagedata generation portion 212 generates image data corresponding to the selection screen illustrated inFIG. 7 , the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 , and the swing diagnosis screen illustrated inFIG. 9 , on the basis of various pieces of information received by thedata acquisition portion 210. - The image
data generation portion 212 performs, for example, a process of generating image data of a correlation diagram related to an estimation result of a ball arrival position illustrated inFIG. 41 , and a process of generating image data of another user corresponding to the first region image AA (for example, ball arrival positions) displayed on thedisplay section 25. For example, the imagedata generation portion 212 generates image data (second region image data) corresponding to, for example, the second region image BB illustrated inFIG. 41 on the basis of a plurality of pieces of swing analysis data performed by another user stored in thestorage section 24. - The
display processing portion 214 performs a process of displaying various images (including text, symbols, and the like in addition to an image corresponding to the image data generated by the image data generation portion 212) on thedisplay section 25. For example, thedisplay processing portion 214 displays the selection screen illustrated inFIG. 7 , the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 , the swing diagnosis screen illustrated inFIG. 9 , and the like, on thedisplay section 25, on the basis of the image data generated by the imagedata generation portion 212. For example, the imagedata generation portion 212 may display an image, text, or the like for notifying theuser 2 of permission of swing starting on thedisplay section 25 in step S5 inFIG. 4 . For example, thedisplay processing portion 214 may display text information such as text or symbols indicating an analysis result in theswing analysis portion 211 on thedisplay section 25 automatically or in response to an input operation performed by theuser 2 after a swing action of theuser 2 is completed. Alternatively, a display section may be provided in thesensor unit 10, and thedisplay processing portion 214 may transmit image data to thesensor unit 10 via thecommunication section 22, and various images, text, or the like may be displayed on the display section of thesensor unit 10. - The
display processing portion 214 may display the second region images BB for another user along with the first region image AA for theuser 2 displayed as images on thedisplay section 25, in response to an instruction from theuser 2. - The
display processing portion 214 may display, for example, comments related to a ball arrival position, or a ball shooting direction, ball curving, or the like along with the first region image AA or the second region image BB displayed as images on thedisplay section 25. The comments may be diagnosis information based on the first region image AA or information indicating a practice method based on the diagnosis information. As mentioned above, the comments are preferably advice information regarding an analysis result. - As mentioned above, since diagnosis information or a practice method based on the diagnosis information is displayed as comments, the
user 2 can easily understand a swing state, and can thus take appropriate measures in relation to improvement of a swing or perform an efficient practice. - The sound
output processing portion 215 performs a process of outputting various sounds (including voices, buzzer sounds, and the like) from thesound output section 26. For example, the soundoutput processing portion 215 may output a sound for notifying theuser 2 of permission of swing starting from thesound output section 26 in step S5 inFIG. 4 . For example, the soundoutput processing portion 215 may output a sound or a voice indicating an analysis result in theswing analysis portion 211 from thesound output section 26 automatically or in response to an input operation performed by theuser 2 after a swing action of theuser 2 is completed. Alternatively, a sound output section may be provided in thesensor unit 10, and the soundoutput processing portion 215 may transmit various items of sound data or voice data to thesensor unit 10 via thecommunication section 22, and may output various sounds or voices from the sound output section of thesensor unit 10. - A vibration mechanism may be provided in the
swing analysis apparatus 20 or thesensor unit 10, and various pieces of information may be converted into vibration pieces of information by the vibration mechanism so as to be presented to theuser 2. - In the present embodiment, when a position of the
head 3 a of thegolf club 3 at address (during standing still) is set to the origin, an XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system) is defined which has a target line indicating a target hit ball direction as an X axis, an axis on a horizontal plane which is perpendicular to the X axis as a Y axis, and a vertically upward direction (a direction opposite to the gravitational direction) as a Z axis. In order to calculate each index value, theswing analysis portion 211 calculates a position and an attitude of thesensor unit 10 in a time series from the time of the address in the XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system) by using measured data (acceleration data and angular velocity data) in thesensor unit 10. Theswing analysis portion 211 detects respective timings of the swing starting, the top, and the impact illustrated inFIG. 6 , by using the measured data (acceleration data or angular velocity data) in thesensor unit 10. Theswing analysis portion 211 calculates values of the respective indexes (for example, a V zone, efficiency (swing efficiency), rotation, impact, and a down blow (or an upper blow) illustrated in the radar chart ofFIG. 9 ) of the swing by using the time series data of the position and the attitude of thesensor unit 10, and the timings of the swing starting, the top, and the impact, so as to generate theswing analysis data 248. - If the
user 2 performs the action in step S4 inFIG. 4 , first, theswing analysis portion 211 determines that theuser 2 stands still at an address attitude in a case where an amount of changes in acceleration data measured by theacceleration sensor 12 does not continuously exceed a threshold value for a predetermined period of time. Next, theswing analysis portion 211 computes an offset amount included in the measured data by using the measured data (acceleration data and angular velocity data) for the predetermined period of time. Next, theswing analysis portion 211 subtracts the offset amount from the measured data so as to perform bias correction, and computes a position and an attitude of thesensor unit 10 during a swing action of the user 2 (during the action in step S6 inFIG. 4 ) by using the bias-corrected measured data. - Specifically, first, the
swing analysis portion 211 computes a position (initial position) of thesensor unit 10 during standing still (at address) of theuser 2 in the XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system) by using the acceleration data measured by theacceleration sensor 12, thegolf club information 242, and the sensorattachment position information 246. -
FIG. 11 is a plan view in which thegolf club 3 and thesensor unit 10 during standing still (at address) of theuser 2 are viewed from a negative side of an X axis. The origin O (0,0,0) is set at aposition 61 of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3, and coordinates of aposition 62 of a grip end are (0, GY, GZ). Since theuser 2 performs the action in step S4 inFIG. 4 , theposition 62 of the grip end or the initial position of thesensor unit 10 has an X coordinate of 0, and is present on a YZ plane. As illustrated inFIG. 11 , the gravitational acceleration of 1G is applied to thesensor unit 10 during standing still of theuser 2, and thus a relationship between a y axis acceleration y(0) measured by thesensor unit 10 and an inclined angle (an angle formed between the long axis of the shaft and the horizontal plane (XY plane)) α of the shaft of thegolf club 3 is expressed by Equation (1). -
y(0)=1G·sin α (1) - Therefore, the
swing analysis portion 211 can calculate the inclined angle α according to Equation (1) by using any acceleration data between any time points at address (during standing still). - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 subtracts a distance LSG between thesensor unit 10 and the grip end included in the sensorattachment position information 246 from a length L1 of the shaft included in thegolf club information 242, so as to obtain a distance LSH between thesensor unit 10 and thehead 3 a. Theswing analysis portion 211 sets, as the initial position of thesensor unit 10, a position separated by the distance LSH from the position 61 (origin O) of thehead 3 a in a direction (a negative direction of the y axis of the sensor unit 10) specified by the inclined angle α of the shaft. - The
swing analysis portion 211 integrates subsequent acceleration data so as to compute coordinates of a position from the initial position of thesensor unit 10 in a time series. - The
swing analysis portion 211 computes an attitude (initial attitude) of thesensor unit 10 during standing still (at address) of theuser 2 in the XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system) by using acceleration data measured by theacceleration sensor 12. Since theuser 2 performs the action in step S4 inFIG. 4 , the x axis of thesensor unit 10 matches the X axis of the XYZ coordinate system in terms of direction at address (during standing still) of theuser 2, and the y axis of thesensor unit 10 is present on the YZ plane. Therefore, theswing analysis portion 211 can specify the initial attitude of thesensor unit 10 on the basis of the inclined angle α of the shaft of thegolf club 3. - The
swing analysis portion 211 computes changes in attitudes from the initial attitude of thesensor unit 10 by performing rotation calculation using angular velocity data which is subsequently measured by theangular velocity sensor 14. An attitude of thesensor unit 10 may be expressed by, for example, rotation angles (a roll angle, a pitch angle, and a yaw angle) about the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis, or a quaternion. - The
signal processing section 16 of thesensor unit 10 may compute an offset amount of measured data so as to perform bias correction on the measured data, and theacceleration sensor 12 and theangular velocity sensor 14 may have a bias correction function. In this case, it is not necessary for theswing analysis portion 211 to perform bias correction on the measured data. - First, the
swing analysis portion 211 detects a timing (impact timing) at which theuser 2 hit a ball by using measured data. For example, theswing analysis portion 211 may compute a combined value of measured data (acceleration data or angular velocity data), and may detect an impact timing (time point) on the basis of the combined value. - Specifically, first, the
swing analysis portion 211 computes a combined value n0(t) of angular velocities at each time point t by using the angular velocity data (bias-corrected angular velocity data for each time point t). For example, if the angular velocity data items at the time point t are respectively indicated by x(t), y(t), and z(t), theswing analysis portion 211 computes the combined value n0(t) of the angular velocities according to the following Equation (2). -
n 0(t)=√{square root over (x(t)2 +y(t)3 +z(t)2)} (2) - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 converts the combined value n0(t) of the angular velocities at each time point t into a combined value n(t) which is normalized (scale-conversion) within a predetermined range. For example, if the maximum value of the combined value of the angular velocities in an acquisition period of measured data is max(n0), theswing analysis portion 211 converts the combined value n0(t) of the angular velocities into the combined value n(t) which is normalized within a range of 0 to 100 according to the following Equation (3). -
- Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 computes a derivative dn(t) of the normalized combined value n(t) at each time point t. For example, if a cycle for measuring three-axis angular velocity data items is indicated by Δt, theswing analysis portion 211 computes the derivative (difference) dn(t) of the combined value of the angular velocities at the time point t by using the following Equation (4). -
dn(t)=n(t)−n(t−Δt) (4) -
FIG. 12 illustrates examples of three-axis angular velocity data items x(t), y(t) and z(t) obtained when theuser 2 hits thegolf ball 4 by performing a swing. InFIG. 12 , a transverse axis expresses time (msec), and a longitudinal axis expresses angular velocity (dps). -
FIG. 13 is a diagram in which the combined value n0(t) of the three-axis angular velocities is computed according to Equation (2) by using the three-axis angular velocity data items x(t), y(t) and z(t) inFIG. 12 , and then the combined value n(t) normalized to 0 to 100 according to Equation (3) is displayed in a graph. InFIG. 13 , a transverse axis expresses time (msec), and a longitudinal axis expresses a combined value of the angular velocity. -
FIG. 14 is a diagram in which the derivative dn(t) is calculated according to Equation (4) on the basis of the combined value n(t) of the three-axis angular velocities inFIG. 13 , and is displayed in a graph. InFIG. 14 , a transverse axis expresses time (msec), and a longitudinal axis expresses a derivative value of the combined value of the three-axis angular velocities. InFIGS. 12 and 13 , the transverse axis is displayed at 0 seconds to 5 seconds, but, inFIG. 14 , the transverse axis is displayed at 2 seconds to 2.8 seconds so that changes in the derivative value before and after impact can be understood. - Next, of time points at which a value of the derivative dn(t) of the combined value becomes the maximum and the minimum, the
swing analysis portion 211 specifies the earlier time point as an impact time point timpact (impact timing) (refer toFIG. 14 ). It is considered that swing speed is the maximum at the moment of impact in a typical golf swing. In addition, since it is considered that a value of the combined value of the angular velocities also changes according to a swing speed, theswing analysis portion 211 can capture a timing at which a derivative value of the combined value of the angular velocities is the maximum or the minimum (that is, a timing at which the derivative value of the combined value of the angular velocities is a positive maximum value or a negative minimum value) in a series of swing actions as the impact timing. Since thegolf club 3 vibrates due to the impact, a timing at which a derivative value of the combined value of the angular velocities is the maximum and a timing at which a derivative value of the combined value of the angular velocities is the minimum may occur in pairs, and, of the two timings, the earlier timing may be the moment of the impact. - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 specifies a time point of a minimum point at which the combined value n(t) is close to 0 before the impact time point timpact, as a top time point ttop (top timing) (refer toFIG. 13 ). It is considered that, in a typical golf swing, an action temporarily stops at the top after starting the swing, then a swing speed increases, and finally impact occurs. Therefore, theswing analysis portion 211 can capture a timing at which the combined value of the angular velocities is close to 0 and becomes the minimum before the impact timing, as the top timing. - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 sets an interval in which the combined value n(t) is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold value before and after the top time point ttop, as a top interval, and detects a last time point at which the combined value n(t) is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold value before a starting time point of the top interval, as a swing starting (backswing starting) time point tstart (refer toFIG. 13 ). It is hardly considered that, in a typical golf swing, a swing action is started from a standing still state, and the swing action is stopped till the top. Therefore, theswing analysis portion 211 can capture the last timing at which the combined value of the angular velocities is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold value before the top interval as a timing of starting the swing action. Theswing analysis portion 211 may detect a time point of the minimum point at which the combined value n(t) is close to 0 before the top time point ttop as the swing starting time point tstart. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may also detect each of a swing starting timing, a top timing, and an impact timing by using three-axis acceleration data in the same manner. - The shaft plane is a first virtual plane specified by a target line (target hit ball direction) and the longitudinal direction of the shaft of the
golf club 3 at address (standing still state) of theuser 2 before starting a swing. The Hogan plane is a second virtual plane specified by a virtual line connecting the vicinity of the shoulder (the shoulder or the base of the neck) of theuser 2 to thehead 3 a of the golf club (or the golf ball 4), and the target line (target hit ball direction), at address of theuser 2. -
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating the shaft plane and the Hogan plane.FIG. 15 displays the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis of the XYZ coordinate system (global coordinate system). - As illustrated in
FIG. 15 , in the present embodiment, a virtual plane which includes afirst line segment 51 as a first axis along a target hit ball direction and asecond line segment 52 as a second axis along the longitudinal direction of the shaft of thegolf club 3, and has four vertices such as U1, U2, S1, and S2, as the shaft plane SP (first virtual plane). In the present embodiment, theposition 61 of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 at address is set as the origin O (0,0,0) of the XYZ coordinate system, and thesecond line segment 52 is a line segment connecting the position 61 (origin O) of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 to theposition 62 of the grip end. Thefirst line segment 51 is a line segment having a length UL in which U1 and U2 on the X axis are both ends, and the origin O is a midpoint. Since theuser 2 performs the action in step S4 inFIG. 4 at address, and thus the shaft of thegolf club 3 is perpendicular to the target line (X axis), thefirst line segment 51 is a line segment orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the shaft of thegolf club 3, that is, thesecond line segment 52. Theswing analysis portion 211 calculates coordinates of the four vertices U1, U2, S1, and S2 of the shaft plane SP in the XYZ coordinate system. - Specifically, first, the
swing analysis portion 211 computes coordinates (0, GY, GZ) of theposition 62 of the grip end of thegolf club 3 by using the inclined angle α and the length L1 of the shaft included in thegolf club information 242. As illustrated inFIG. 11 , theswing analysis portion 211 may compute GY and GZ by using the length L1 of the shaft and the inclined angle α according to Equations (5) and (6). -
G Y =L 1·cos α (5) -
G Z =L 1 sin α (6) - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 multiplies the coordinates (0, GY, GZ) of theposition 62 of the grip end of thegolf club 3 by a scale factor S so as to compute coordinates (0, SY, SZ) of a midpoint S3 of the vertex S1 and the vertex S2 of the shaft plane SP. In other words, theswing analysis portion 211 computes SY and SZ according to Equations (7) and (8), respectively. -
S Y =G Y ·S (7) -
S Z =G Z ·S (8) -
FIG. 16 is a view in which a sectional view of the shaft plane SP inFIG. 15 which is cut in the YZ plane is viewed from the negative side of the X axis. As illustrated inFIG. 16 , a length (a width of the shaft plane SP in a direction orthogonal to the X axis) of a line segment connecting the midpoint S3 of the vertex S and the vertex S2 to the origin O is S times the length L1 of thesecond line segment 52. The scale factor S is set to a value at which a trajectory of thegolf club 3 during a swing action of theuser 2 enters the shaft plane SP. For example, if a length of the arms of theuser 2 is indicated by L2, the scale factor S may be set as in Equation (9) so that the width S×L1 of the shaft plane SP in the direction orthogonal to the X axis is twice the sum of the length L1 of the shaft and the length L2 of the arms. -
- The length L2 of the arms of the
user 2 is associated with a height L0 of theuser 2. The length L2 of the arms is expressed by a correlation expression such as Equation (10) in a case where theuser 2 is a male, and is expressed by a correlation expression such as Equation (11) in a case where theuser 2 is a female, on the basis of statistical information. -
L 2=0.41×L 0−45.5[mm] (10) -
L 2=0.46×L 0−126.9[mm] (11) - Therefore, the
swing analysis portion 211 may calculate the length L2 of the arms of the user according to Equation (10) or Equation (11) by using the height L0 and the sex of theuser 2 included in thephysical information 244. - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 computes coordinates (−UL/2,0,0) of the vertex U1 of the shaft plane SP, coordinates (UL/2,0,0) of a vertex U2, coordinates (−UL/2, SY, SZ) of the vertex S1, and coordinates (UL/2, SY, SZ) of thevertex 52 by using the coordinates (O, SY, SZ) of the midpoint S3 and a width (the length of the first line segment 51) UL of the shaft plane SP in the X axis direction. The width UL in the X axis direction is set to a value at which a trajectory of thegolf club 3 during a swing action of theuser 2 enters the shaft plane SP. For example, the width UL in the X axis direction may be set to be same as the width S×L1 in the direction orthogonal to the X axis, that is, twice the sum of the length L1 of the shaft and the length L2 of the arms. - In the above-described manner, the
swing analysis portion 211 can calculate the coordinates of the four vertices U1, U2, S1, and S2 of the shaft plane SP. - As illustrated in
FIG. 15 , in the present embodiment, a virtual plane which includes afirst line segment 51 as a first axis and athird line segment 53 as a third axis, and has four vertices such as U1, U2, H1, and 1H2, is used as the Hogan plane HP (second virtual plane). Thethird line segment 53 is a line segment connecting apredetermined position 63 in the vicinity of a line segment connecting both of the shoulders of theuser 2, to theposition 61 of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3. However, thethird line segment 53 may be a line segment connecting thepredetermined position 63 to a position of thegolf ball 4. Theswing analysis portion 211 calculates respective coordinates of the four vertices U1, U2, H1, and H2 of the Hogan plane HP in the XYZ coordinate system. - Specifically, first, the
swing analysis portion 211 estimates thepredetermined position 63 by using the coordinates (0, GY, GZ) of theposition 62 of the grip end of thegolf club 3 at address (during standing still), and the length L2 of the arms of theuser 2 based on thephysical information 244, and computes coordinates (AX, AY, AZ) thereof. -
FIG. 17 is a view in which a sectional view of the Hogan plane HP illustrated inFIG. 15 which is cut in the YZ plane is viewed from the negative side of the X axis. InFIG. 17 , a midpoint of the line segment connecting both of the shoulders of theuser 2 is thepredetermined position 63, and thepredetermined position 63 is present on the YZ plane. Therefore, an X coordinate AX of thepredetermined position 63 is 0. As illustrated inFIG. 17 , theswing analysis portion 211 estimates, as thepredetermined position 63, a position obtained by moving theposition 62 of the grip end of thegolf club 3 by the length L2 of the arms of theuser 2 in a positive direction along the Z axis. Therefore, theswing analysis portion 211 sets a Y coordinate AY of thepredetermined position 63 to be the same as the Y coordinate GY of theposition 62 of the grip end. Theswing analysis portion 211 computes a Z coordinate AZ of thepredetermined position 63 as a sum of the Z coordinate GZ of theposition 62 of the grip end and the length L2 of the arms of theuser 2 as in Equation (12). -
A Z =G Z +L Z (12) - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 multiplies the Y coordinate AY and the Z coordinate AZ of thepredetermined position 63 by a scale factor H, so as to compute coordinates (0, HY, HZ) of a midpoint H3 of the vertex H1 and the vertex H2 of the Hogan plane HP. In other words, theswing analysis portion 211 computes HY and HZ according to Equation (13) and Equation (14), respectively. -
H Y =A Y ·H (13) -
H Z =A Z ·H (14) - As illustrated in
FIG. 17 , a length (a width of the Hogan plane HP in a direction orthogonal to the X axis) of a line segment connecting the midpoint H3 of the vertex H1 and the vertex H2 to the origin O is H times the length L3 of thethird line segment 53. The scale factor H is set to a value at which a trajectory of thegolf club 3 during a swing action of theuser 2 enters the Hogan plane HP. For example, the Hogan plane HP may have the same shape and size as the shape and the size of the shaft plane SP. In this case, the width H×L3 of the Hogan plane HP in the direction orthogonal to the X axis matches the width S×L1 of the shaft plane SP in the direction orthogonal to the X axis, and is twice the sum of the length L1 of the shaft of thegolf club 3 and the length L2 of the arms of theuser 2. Therefore, theswing analysis portion 211 may compute the scale factor H according to Equation (15). -
- The
swing analysis portion 211 may compute the length L3 of thethird line segment 53 according to Equation (13) by using the Y coordinate AY and the Z coordinate AZ of thepredetermined position 63. - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 computes coordinates (−UL/2, HY, HZ) of the vertex H1 of the Hogan plane HP, and coordinates (UL/2, HY, HZ) of the vertex H2 by using the coordinates (0, HY, HZ) of the midpoint H3 and a width (the length of the first line segment 51) UL of the Hogan plane HP in the X axis direction. The two vertices U1 and U2 of the Hogan plane HP are the same as those of the shaft plane SP, and thus theswing analysis portion 211 does not need to compute coordinates of the vertices U1 and U2 of the Hogan plane HP again. - In the above-described manner, the
swing analysis portion 211 can calculate the coordinates of the four vertices U1, U2, H1, and H2 of the Hogan plane HP. - A region interposed between the shaft plane SP (first virtual plane) and the Hogan plane HP (second virtual plane) is referred to as a “V zone”, and a trajectory of a hit ball (a ball line) may be estimated to some extent on the basis of a relationship between a position of the
head 3 a of thegolf club 3 and the V zone during a backswing or a downswing. For example, in a case where thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 is present in a space lower than the V zone at a predetermined timing during a backswing or a downswing, a hit ball is likely to fly in a hook direction. In a case where thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 is present in a space higher than the V zone at a predetermined timing during a backswing or a downswing, a hit ball is likely to fly in a slice direction. In the present embodiment, as is clear fromFIG. 17 , an angle β formed between the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP is determined depending on the length L1 of the shaft of thegolf club 3 and the length L2 of the arms of theuser 2. In other words, since the angle β is not a fixed value, and is determined depending on the type ofgolf club 3 or physical features of theuser 2, the more appropriate shaft plane SP and Hogan plane HP (V zone) are calculated as an index for diagnosing a swing of theuser 2. - A position of the
head 3 a at halfway back is a position of thehead 3 a at the moment of the halfway back, right before the halfway back, or right after the halfway back, and a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down is a position of thehead 3 a at the moment of the halfway down, right before the halfway down, or right after the halfway down. - First, the
swing analysis portion 211 computes a position of thehead 3 a and a position of the grip end at each time point t by using the position and the attitude of thesensor unit 10 at each time point t from the swing start time point tstart to the impact time point timpact. - Specifically, the
swing analysis portion 211 uses, as a position of thehead 3 a, a position separated by the distance LSH in the positive direction of the y axis specified by the attitude of thesensor unit 10, from the position of thesensor unit 10 at each time point t, and computes coordinates of the position of thehead 3 a. As described above, the distance LSH is a distance between thesensor unit 10 and thehead 3 a. Theswing analysis portion 211 uses a position separated by the distance LSG in the negative direction of the y axis specified by the attitude of thesensor unit 10, from the position of thesensor unit 10 at each time point t, and computes coordinates of the position of the grip end. As described above, the distance LSG is a distance between thesensor unit 10 and the grip end. - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 detects a halfway back timing and a halfway down timing by using the coordinates of the position of thehead 3 a and the coordinates of the position of the grip end. - Specifically, the
swing analysis portion 211 computes a difference ΔZ between a Z coordinate of the position of thehead 3 a and a Z coordinate of the position of the grip end at each time point t from the swing start time point tstart to the impact time point timpact. Theswing analysis portion 211 detects a time point tHWB at which a sign of ΔZ is inverted between the swing start time point tstart and the top time point ttop, as the halfway back timing. Theswing analysis portion 211 detects a time point tHWD at which a sign of ΔZ is inverted between the swing start time point ttop, and the impact time point timpact, as the halfway down timing. - The
swing analysis portion 211 uses the position of thehead 3 a at the time point tHWB as a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back, and uses the position of thehead 3 a at the time point tHWD as a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down. - A head speed is the magnitude of a speed of the
head 3 a at impact (the moment of the impact, right before the impact, or right after the impact). For example, theswing analysis portion 211 computes a speed of thehead 3 a at the impact time point timpact on the basis of differences between the coordinates of the position of thehead 3 a at the impact time point timpact and coordinates of a position of thehead 3 a at the previous time point. Theswing analysis portion 211 computes the magnitude of the speed of thehead 3 a as the head speed. - The face angle is an index based on an inclination of the
head 3 a of thegolf club 3 at impact, and the club path (incidence angle) is an index based on a trajectory of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 at impact. -
FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the face angle and the club path (incidence angle).FIG. 18 illustrates the golf club 3 (only thehead 3 a is illustrated) on the XY plane viewed from a positive side of the Z axis in the XYZ coordinate system. InFIG. 18 , thereference numeral 74 indicates a face surface (hitting surface) of thegolf club 3, and thereference numeral 75 indicates a ball hitting point. Thereference numeral 70 indicates a target line indicating a target hit ball direction, and thereference numeral 71 indicates a plane orthogonal to thetarget line 70. Thereference numeral 76 indicates a curve indicating a trajectory of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3, and thereference numeral 72 is a tangential line at theball hitting point 75 for thecurve 76. In this case, the face angle φ is an angle formed between theplane 71 and theface surface 74, that is, an angle formed between astraight line 73 orthogonal to theface surface 74, and thetarget line 70. The club path (incidence angle) w is an angle formed between the tangential line 72 (a direction in which thehead 3 a in the XY plane passes through the ball hitting point 75) and thetarget line 70. - For example, assuming that an angle formed between the
face surface 74 of thehead 3 a and the x axis direction is normally constant (for example, orthogonal), theswing analysis portion 211 computes a direction of a straight line orthogonal to theface surface 74 on the basis of the attitude of thesensor unit 10 at the impact time point timpact. Theswing analysis portion 211 uses, a straight line obtained by setting a Z axis component of the direction of the straight line to 0, as a direction of thestraight line 73, and computes an angle (face angle) φ formed between thestraight line 73 and thetarget line 70. - For example, the
swing analysis portion 211 uses a direction of a speed (that is, a speed of thehead 3 a in the XY plane) obtained by setting a Z axis component of a speed of thehead 3 a at the impact time point timpact to 0, as a direction of thetangential line 72, and computes an angle (club path (incidence angle)) ψ formed between thetangential line 72 and thetarget line 70. - The face angle φ indicates an inclination of the
face surface 74 with thetarget line 70 whose direction is fixed regardless of an incidence direction of thehead 3 a to theball hitting point 75 as a reference, and is thus also referred to as an absolute face angle. In contrast, an angle η formed between thestraight line 73 and thetangential line 72 indicates an inclination of theface surface 74 with an incidence direction of thehead 3 a to theball hitting point 75 as a reference, and is thus referred to as a relative face angle. The relative face angle η is an angle obtained by subtracting the club path (incidence angle) ψ from the (absolute) face angle φ. - The shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top is an angle (relative rotation angle) by which the
golf club 3 is rotated about a shaft axis from a reference timing to a top timing. The reference timing is, for example, the time of starting a backswing, or the time of address. In the present embodiment, in a case where theuser 2 is a right-handed golfer, a right-handed screw tightening direction toward the tip end on thehead 3 a side of the golf club 3 (a clockwise direction when thehead 3 a is viewed from the grip end side) is a positive direction of the shaft axis rotation angle θtop. Conversely, in a case where theuser 2 is a left-handed golfer, a left-handed screw tightening direction toward the tip end on thehead 3 a side of the golf club 3 (a counterclockwise direction when thehead 3 a is viewed from the grip end side) is a positive direction of the shaft axis rotation angle θtop. -
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporal change of the shaft axis rotation angle from starting of a swing (starting of a backswing) to impact. InFIG. 19 , a transverse axis expresses time (s), and a longitudinal axis expresses a shaft axis rotation angle (deg).FIG. 19 illustrates the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top with the time of starting a swing (the time of starting a backswing) as a reference timing (at which the shaft axis rotation angle is 0°). - In the present embodiment, as illustrated in
FIG. 3 , the y axis of thesensor unit 10 substantially matches the longitudinal direction of the shaft of the golf club 3 (the longitudinal direction of the golf club 3). Therefore, for example, theswing analysis portion 211 time-integrates a y axis angular velocity included in angular velocity data from the swing starting (backswing starting) time point tstart or the time of address to the top time point ttop (at top), so as to compute the shaft axis rotation angle θtop. - The grip deceleration ratio is an index based on a grip deceleration amount, and is a ratio between a speed of the grip when the grip starts to be decelerated during the downswing, and a speed of the grip at impact. The grip deceleration time ratio is an index based on a grip deceleration period, and is a ratio between a period of time from the time at which the grip starts to be decelerated during the downswing to the time of impact, and a period of time of the downswing. A speed of the grip is preferably a speed of a portion held by the
user 2, but may be a speed of any portion of the grip (for example, the grip end), and may be a speed of a peripheral portion of the grip. -
FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporal change of a speed of the grip during the downswing. InFIG. 20 , a transverse axis expresses time (s), and a longitudinal axis expresses a speed (m/s) of the grip. InFIG. 20 , if a speed (the maximum speed of the grip) when the grip starts to be decelerated is indicated by V1, and a speed of the grip at impact is indicated by V2, a grip deceleration ratio RV (unit: %) is expressed by the following Equation (16). -
- In
FIG. 20 , if a period of time from the time of top to the time at which the grip starts to be decelerated is indicated by T1, and a period of time from the time at which the grip starts to be decelerated during the downswing to the time of impact is indicated by T2, a grip deceleration time ratio RT (unit: %) is expressed by the following Equation (17). -
- For example, the
sensor unit 10 may be attached to the vicinity of a portion of thegolf club 3 held by theuser 2, and a speed of thesensor unit 10 may be regarded as a speed of the grip. Therefore, first, theswing analysis portion 211 computes a speed of thesensor unit 10 at the time point t on the basis of differences between coordinates of a position of thesensor unit 10 at each time point t from the top time point ttop to the impact time point timpact (during the downswing) and coordinates of a position of thesensor unit 10 at the previous time point. - Next, the
swing analysis portion 211 computes the magnitude of the speed of thesensor unit 10 at each time point t, sets the maximum value thereof as V1, and sets the magnitude of the speed at the impact time point timpact as V2. Theswing analysis portion 211 specifies a time point tvmax at which the magnitude of the speed of thesensor unit 10 becomes the maximum value V1. Theswing analysis portion 211 computes T1=tvmax−ttop, and T2=timpact−tvmax. Theswing analysis portion 211 computes the grip deceleration ratio RV and the grip deceleration time ratio RT according to Equations (16) and (17), respectively. - The
swing analysis portion 211 may regard a speed of the grip end as a speed of the grip, and may compute the speed of the grip end on the basis of coordinates of a position of the grip end at each time point t during the downswing, so as to obtain the grip deceleration ratio RV and the grip deceleration time ratio RT through the above-described computation. -
FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining definition of an attack angle δ. In the present embodiment, the XYZ coordinate system is defined which has a target line indicating a target hitting direction as an X axis, an axis on a horizontal plane which is perpendicular to the X axis as a Y axis, and a vertical direction (a direction opposite to the gravitational direction) as a Z axis, andFIG. 21 illustrates the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis. The target line indicates, for example, a target direction in which a ball flies straight. InFIG. 21 , a point R is a ball hitting point at which thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 comes into contact with agolf ball 4, a curve L1 indicates a part of a trajectory during a swing of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 in an XZ plane, and a straight line L2 is a tangential line of the curve L1 at the hall hitting point R in the XZ plane. As illustrated inFIG. 21 , an attack angle is defined as an angle δ of the straight line L2 with respect to the XY plane (horizontal plane) SXY. InFIG. 21 , a rightward direction toward the drawing surface along the X axis which is parallel to the XY plane (horizontal plane) SXY is a target hitting direction. Therefore, the attack angle δ can be said to be an angle formed between a direction of the tangential line (straight line L2) which is in contact with the trajectory (curve L1) of a swing of the head (ball hitting portion) 3 a of the golf club (exercise appliance) 3 and a target hitting direction along the X axis. - The target hitting direction also includes a direction orthogonal to the face surface of the
head 3 a of thegolf club 3, a hitting direction which is set in advance by the user, a direction connecting a direct distance to a hole cup, and the like. - In the present embodiment, regarding signs of the attack angle δ, when the Y axis is a rotation axis, a direction (a clockwise direction in
FIG. 21 ) in which +Z (vertically upward direction) of the Z axis rotates in the +X direction (rightward direction toward the drawing surface) of the X axis is defined as a first sign, and a sign reverse to the first sign is defined as a second sign. As illustrated inFIG. 21 , the first sign is, for example, negative (−), and the second sign is positive (+). A sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ illustrated inFIG. 21 is the first sign (negative). In other words, the attack angle δ<0° occurs at the time of a down blow in which thehead 3 a is incident to the ball hitting point R obliquely downwardly toward the drawing surface. The attack angle δ=0° occurs at the time of a level blow in which thehead 3 a is incident to the ball hitting point R horizontally along the X axis. The attack angle δ>0° occurs at the time of a down blow in which thehead 3 a is incident to the ball hitting point R obliquely upwardly toward the drawing surface. - On the other hand, regarding signs of the face angle (second angle) φ illustrated in
FIG. 18 , when the Z axis is a rotation axis, a direction (a clockwise direction toward the drawing surface inFIG. 18 ) in which +Y of the Y axis rotates in the +X direction of the X axis is defined as a third sign, and a sign reverse to the third sign is defined as a fourth sign. As illustrated inFIG. 18 , the third sign is, for example, negative (−), and the fourth sign is positive (+). A sign of the face angle (second angle) φ illustrated inFIG. 18 is the third sign (negative). In other words, the face angle φ<0° occurs when thehead 3 a reaches impact in a closed state with an inside-out trajectory. The face angle φ=0° occurs when theface surface 74 of thehead 3 a is vertically incident to the target line. The face angle φ>0° occurs when thehead 3 a reaches impact in an open state with an outside-in trajectory. - The
swing analysis portion 211 illustrated inFIG. 10 may include a first angle calculator which calculates the attack angle δ and a second angle calculator which calculates the face angle φ. The first and second angle calculators respectively calculate the first and second angles δ and φ on the basis of the relationships illustrated inFIGS. 21 and 18 by using an output from thedata acquisition portion 210 illustrated inFIG. 10 , that is, an output from thesensor unit 10. -
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a swing analysis process (swing analysis method) performed by theprocessing section 21. Theprocessing section 21 performs the swing analysis process, for example, according to the procedures shown in the flowchart ofFIG. 22 by executing theswing analysis program 240 stored in thestorage section 24. Hereinafter, the flowchart ofFIG. 22 will be described. - First, the
processing section 21 waits for theuser 2 to perform a measurement starting operation (the operation in step S2 inFIG. 4 ) (N in step S10), transmits a measurement starting command to thesensor unit 10 if the measurement starting operation is performed (Y in step S10), and starts to acquire measured data from the sensor unit 10 (step S12). - Next, the
processing section 21 instructs theuser 2 to take an address attitude (step S14). Theuser 2 takes the address attitude in response to the instruction, and stands still for a predetermined period of time or more (step S4 inFIG. 4 ). - Next, if a standing still state of the
user 2 is detected by using the measured data acquired from the sensor unit 10 (Y in step S16), theprocessing section 21 notifies theuser 2 of permission of swing starting (step S18). Theprocessing section 21 outputs, for example, a predetermined sound, or an LED is provided in thesensor unit 10, and the LED is lighted, so that theuser 2 is notified of permission of swing starting. Theuser 2 confirms the notification and then starts a swing action (the action in step S6 inFIG. 4 ). - Next, the
processing section 21 performs processes in step S20 and subsequent steps after completion of the swing action of theuser 2, or from before completion of the swing action. - First, the
processing section 21 computes an initial position and an initial attitude of thesensor unit 10 by using the measured data (measured data during standing still (at address) of the user 2) acquired from the sensor unit 10 (step S20). - Next, the
processing section 21 detects a swing starting timing, a top timing, and an impact timing by using the measured data acquired from the sensor unit 10 (step S22). - The
processing section 21 computes a position and an attitude of thesensor unit 10 during the swing action of theuser 2 in parallel to the process in step S22, or before and after the process in step S22 (step S24). - Next, in steps S26 to S34, the
processing section 21 computes values of various indexes regarding the swing by using at least some of the measured data acquired from thesensor unit 10, the swing starting, top and impact timings detected in step S22, and the position and the attitude of thesensor unit 10 computed in step S24. - The
processing section 21 computes the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP in step S26. - The
processing section 21 computes a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back and a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down in step S28. - The
processing section 21 computes a head speed, the face angle φ, the attack angle δ, and the club path (incidence angle) ψ in step S30. - The
processing section 21 computes the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top in step S32. - The
processing section 21 computes the grip deceleration ratio RV and the grip deceleration time ratio RT in step S34. - The
processing section 21 generates theswing analysis data 248 by using the various indexes calculated in steps S26 to S34, transmits the swing analysis data to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 (step S36), and finishes the swing analysis process. - In the flowchart of
FIG. 22 , order of the respective steps may be changed as appropriate within an allowable range, some of the steps may be omitted or changed, and other steps may be added thereto. -
FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30. As illustrated inFIG. 23 , in the present embodiment, theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 is configured to include aprocessing section 31, acommunication section 32, and astorage section 34. However, theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 may have a configuration in which some of the constituent elements are deleted or changed as appropriate, or may have a configuration in which other constituent elements are added thereto. - The
storage section 34 is constituted of, for example, various IC memories such as a ROM, a flash ROM, and a RAM, or a recording medium such as a hard disk or a memory card. Thestorage section 34 stores a program for theprocessing section 31 performing various calculation processes or a control process, or various programs or data for realizing application functions. - In the present embodiment, the
storage section 34 stores aswing diagnosis program 340 which is read by theprocessing section 31 and executes a swing diagnosis process. Theswing diagnosis program 340 may be stored in a nonvolatile recording medium (computer readable recording medium) in advance, or theswing diagnosis program 340 may be received from a server (not illustrated) by theprocessing section 31 via thenetwork 40, and may be stored in thestorage section 34. - In the present embodiment, the
storage section 34 stores (preserves) a swing analysis data list 341 including a plurality of pieces ofswing analysis data 248 generated by theswing analysis apparatus 20. In other words, theswing analysis data 248 generated whenever theprocessing section 21 of theswing analysis apparatus 20 analyzes a swing action of theuser 2 is sequentially added to the swinganalysis data list 341. - In the present embodiment, the
storage section 34 stores a V zone score table 342, a rotation score table 343, an impact score table 344, a down blow score table 345, an upper blow score table 346, and a swing efficiency score table 347. The score tables will be described later in detail. - The
storage section 34 is used as a work region of theprocessing section 31, and temporarily stores results of calculation executed by theprocessing section 31 according to various programs, and the like. Thestorage section 34 may store data which is required to be preserved for a long period of time among pieces of data generated through processing of theprocessing section 31. - The
communication section 32 performs data communication with the communication section 27 (refer toFIG. 10 ) of theswing analysis apparatus 20 via thenetwork 40. For example, thecommunication section 32 performs a process of receiving theswing analysis data 248 from thecommunication section 27 of theswing analysis apparatus 20, and transmitting theswing analysis data 248 to theprocessing section 31. For example, thecommunication section 32 performs a process of transmitting information required to display the selection screen illustrated inFIG. 7 to thecommunication section 27 of theswing analysis apparatus 20, or a process of receiving selected information on the selection screen illustrated inFIG. 7 from thecommunication section 27 of theswing analysis apparatus 20 and transmitting the selected information to theprocessing section 31. For example, thecommunication section 32 performs a process of receiving information required to display the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 from theprocessing section 31, and transmitting the information to thecommunication section 27 of theswing analysis apparatus 20. For example, thecommunication section 32 performs a process of receiving input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button on the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 being pressed from thecommunication section 27 of theswing analysis apparatus 20, transmitting the input data to theprocessing section 31, receiving diagnosis result information (scores or a total score of a plurality of items indicating features of a swing of the user 2) based on the input data from theprocessing section 31, and transmitting the diagnosis information and the lesson information to thecommunication section 27 of theswing analysis apparatus 20. For example, thecommunication section 32 performs a process of receiving information required to display the swing diagnosis screen illustrated inFIG. 9 from theprocessing section 31, and transmitting the information to thecommunication section 27 of theswing analysis apparatus 20. - The
processing section 31 performs a process of receiving theswing analysis data 248 from theswing analysis apparatus 20 via thecommunication section 32 and storing theswing analysis data 248 in the storage section 34 (adding the swing analysis data to the swing analysis data list 341), according to various programs. Theprocessing section 31 performs a process of receiving various pieces of information from theswing analysis apparatus 20 via thecommunication section 32, and transmitting information required to display various screens (the respective screens illustrated inFIGS. 7, 8 and 9 ) to theswing analysis apparatus 20, according to various programs. Theprocessing section 31 performs other various control processes. - Particularly, in the present embodiment, the
processing section 31 functions as adata acquisition portion 310, ascore calculation portion 311, and astorage processing portion 312 by executing theswing diagnosis program 340, and performs a diagnosis process (swing diagnosis process) on theswing analysis data 248 selected from the swinganalysis data list 341. - The
data acquisition portion 310 performs a process of receiving theswing analysis data 248 received from theswing analysis apparatus 20 by thecommunication section 32 and transmitting theswing analysis data 248 to thestorage processing portion 312. Thedata acquisition portion 310 performs a process of receiving various pieces of information received from theswing analysis apparatus 20 by thecommunication section 32 and transmitting the information to thescore calculation portion 311. - The
storage processing portion 312 performs read/write processes of various programs or various data for thestorage section 34. For example, thestorage processing portion 312 performs a process of receiving theswing analysis data 248 from thedata acquisition portion 310 and storing theswing analysis data 248 in the storage section 34 (adding the swing analysis data to the swing analysis data list 341), a process of reading theswing analysis data 248 from the swing analysis data list 341 stored in thestorage section 34, or the like. For example, thestorage processing portion 312 performs a process of reading the V zone score table 342, the rotation score table 343, the impact score table 344, the down blow score table 345, the upper blow score table 346, and the swing efficiency score table 347 stored in thestorage section 34. - The score calculation portion 311 (level calculation unit) performs a process of calculating scores (levels) of a plurality of items on the basis of data regarding a swing. In the present embodiment, the data regarding a swing may be input data at the time of the diagnosis starting button on the input data editing screen illustrated in
FIG. 8 being pressed, may be theswing analysis data 248 selected on the selection screen illustrated inFIG. 7 , and may include both of the data. - For example, in a case where the sex, the type of golf club, and each index of a swing are not edited in a state of being initial values, and the diagnosis starting button is pressed on the input data editing screen illustrated in
FIG. 8 , thescore calculation portion 311 performs a process of calculating scores on the basis of theswing analysis data 248 selected from the swinganalysis data list 341. On the other hand, in a case where at least one of the sex, the type of golf club, and each index of a swing is edited, and then the diagnosis starting button is pressed on the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 , thescore calculation portion 311 performs a process of calculating scores on the basis of data (pseudo-data) in which at least a part of the selectedswing analysis data 248 is edited. - A plurality of items which are score calculation targets include a first item regarding at least one of a backswing and a downswing. The first item may include an item indicating a relationship among at least one virtual plane, a position of the
head 3 a (an example of a ball hitting portion) of the golf club 3 (an example of an exercise appliance) at a first timing during the backswing, and a position of thehead 3 a at a second timing during the downswing. For example, the first timing may be the time at which the longitudinal direction of thegolf club 3 becomes a direction along the horizontal direction during the backswing. For example, the second timing may be the time at which the longitudinal direction of thegolf club 3 becomes a direction along the horizontal direction during the downswing. - At least one virtual plane may include the shaft plane SP which is a first virtual plane specified on the basis of the
first line segment 51 which is a first axis along a target hit ball direction (target line) in the XY plane as a reference plane, and thesecond line segment 52 which is a second axis along the longitudinal direction of thegolf club 3 before starting a backswing. The time before starting a backswing may be the time of address (when theuser 2 takes an address attitude and stands still). - At least one virtual plane may include the Hogan plane HP which is a second virtual plane (that is, the second virtual plane which forms a first angle β with the first virtual plane) specified on the basis of the
first line segment 51 which is a first axis along a target hit ball direction (target line) in the XY plane as a reference plane, and thethird line segment 53 which is a third axis forming the first angle β with the longitudinal direction of thegolf club 3 before starting a backswing. - At least one virtual plane may include only one of the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP. At least one virtual plane may include other virtual planes (for example, a plane interposed between the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP, a plane outside the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP, and a plane intersecting at least one of the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP) instead of the shaft plane SP or the Hogan plane HP.
- Hereinafter, the first item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as a “V zone” item) indicating a relationship among four indexes of a swing, that is, the “shaft plane SP”, the “Hogan plane HP”, a “position of the
head 3 a at halfway back”, and a “position of thehead 3 a at halfway down”. - The first item may include an item regarding swing efficiency. The item regarding swing efficiency may be an item indicating a relationship between a deceleration amount and a deceleration period of the grip of the
golf club 3 in a downswing. Hereinafter, the first item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as a “swing efficiency” item) indicating a relationship between a “grip deceleration ratio” which is an index based on the deceleration amount of the grip and a “grip deceleration time ratio” which is an index based on the deceleration period of the grip, as the item regarding swing efficiency. - The plurality of items which are score calculation targets also include a second item regarding impact (at ball hitting). The second item may include an item indicating a relationship between an incidence angle of the
head 3 a of thegolf club 3 and an inclination of thehead 3 a at impact (at ball hitting). Hereinafter, the second item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as an “impact” item) indicating a relationship between the “club path (incidence angle) ψ” which is an index based on the incidence angle of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 at impact and the “relative face angle η” which is an index based on the inclination of thehead 3 a at impact. - The second item may include an item indicating a relationship between an attack angle of the
head 3 a of thegolf club 3 and an absolute face angle at impact (at ball hitting). Hereinafter, the second item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as a “down blow” item or an “upper blow” item) indicating a relationship between the “attack angle δ” which depends on a position of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 and the lowest point thereof at impact and the “absolute face angle φ” which is an index based on the inclination of thehead 3 a at impact. - The plurality of items which are score calculation targets may also include a third item regarding the time at which a swing transitions from a backswing to a downswing, and the time of impact (the time of ball hitting). The third item may include an item indicating a relationship between a rotation angle about the long axis of the
golf club 3 at the time (at top) at which a swing transitions from a backswing to a downswing and an inclination of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 at impact (at ball hitting). Hereinafter, the third item is assumed to include an item (hereinafter, this item will be referred to as a “rotation” item) indicating a relationship between the “shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top” which is an index based on the rotation angle about the long axis of thegolf club 3 at the top timing, and the “(absolute) face angle φ” which is an index based on the inclination of thehead 3 a at impact. - The
score calculation portion 311 performs a process of calculating a total score on the basis of the scores of the plurality of items. Theprocessing section 31 transmits information regarding the scores or the total score of the plurality of items, calculated by thescore calculation portion 311, to theswing analysis apparatus 20 via thecommunication section 32. In other words, theprocessing section 31 also functions as an output section which outputs the information regarding the scores (levels) or the total score of the plurality of items. - In the present embodiment, the
processing section 31 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 performs a process of calculating scores and a total score of a plurality of items indicating features of a swing as a swing analysis process. - A detailed description will be made of a method of calculating a score of each item and a method of calculating a total score in the
score calculation portion 311 of theprocessing section 31. - The
score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “V zone” item depending on in which regions positions of thehead 3 a at halfway back and halfway down are included among a plurality of regions determined based on the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP (V zone). -
FIGS. 24A and 24B are diagrams illustrating examples of relationships among the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP (V zone), and a plurality of regions.FIG. 24A illustrates relationships among the shaft plane SP, the Hogan plane HP, and five regions A to E when viewed from a negative side of the X axis (when projected onto the YZ plane).FIG. 24B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the shaft plane SP, the Hogan plane HP, and an attitude of theuser 2. The region B is a predetermined space including the Hogan plane HP, and the region D is a predetermined space including the shaft plane SP. The region C is a region interposed between the region B and the region D (a space between an interface SBC with region B and an interface SCD with the region D). The region A is a space in contact with the region B in an interface SAB on an opposite side to the region C. The region E is a space in contact with the region D in an interface SDE on an opposite side to the region C. - There may be various methods of setting the interface SAB, the interface SBC, the interface SCD, and the interface SDE. As an example, the interfaces may be set so that, on the YZ plane, the Hogan plane HP is located exactly at the center of the interface SAB and the interface SBC, the shaft plane SP is located exactly at the center of the interface SCD and the interface SDE, and angles of the region B, the region C, and the region D about the origin O (X axis) are the same as each other. In other words, with respect to the first angle β formed between the shaft plane SP and the Hogan plane HP, if each of angles formed between the Hogan plane HP, and the interface SAB and the interface Sac is set to β/4, and each of angles formed between the shaft plane SP, and the interface SCD and the interface SDE is set to β/4, angles of the region B, the region C, and the region D are all set to β/2.
- Since a swing that causes a Y coordinate of a
head 3 a position at halfway back or halfway down to be negative cannot be expected, an interface of the region A opposite to the interface SAB is set in the XZ plane inFIG. 24A . Similarly, a swing that causes a Z coordinate of a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back or halfway down to be negative cannot be expected, and an interface of the region E opposite to the interface SDE is Set in the XY plane. Of course, an interface of the region A or the region E may be set so that an angle of the region A or the region E about the origin O (X axis) is the same as angles of the region B, the region C, and the region D. - Specifically, first, the
score calculation portion 311 sets the interface SAB, the interface SBC, the interface SCD, and the interface SDE of the regions A to E on the basis of coordinates of each of the four vertices U1, U2, S1, and S2 of the shaft plane SP and coordinates of each of the four vertices U1, U2, H1, and H2 of the Hogan plane HP, included in data (selected swing analysis data 248) regarding a swing. Next, thescore calculation portion 311 determines in which region of the regions A to E coordinates of a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back and coordinates of a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down included in the data (selected swing analysis data 248) regarding the swing are included. - Information regarding a determination result thereof is transmitted to the
swing analysis apparatus 20, and is used as the information regarding the “sex” and the “region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down is included” in the input data editing screen illustrated inFIG. 8 . Thereafter, thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to the determination result by referring to the V zone score table 342 and by using information regarding a “region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back is included” and a “region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down is included”, included in the data (diagnosis target input data) regarding the swing. - In the present embodiment, as illustrated in
FIG. 25 , the V zone score table 342 defines a score for each combination of the region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back is included and the region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down is included. For example, in a case where a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back is included in the region A, and a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down is included in the region A, a score is pv1. Each of scores pv1 to pv25 illustrated inFIG. 25 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points. - The
score calculation portion 311 may calculate a lower score as a hit ball predicted on the basis of a relationship among the shaft plane SP, the Hogan plane HP, the position of thehead 3 a at halfway back, and the position of thehead 3 a at halfway down becomes more easily curved. The term “easily curved” may indicate that a trajectory after ball hitting is easily curved (easily sliced or hooked), and may indicate that a hit ball direction is easily deviated relative to a target direction (target line). Alternatively, thescore calculation portion 311 may calculate a higher score as a hit ball more easily flies straight. The term “easily flies straight” may indicate that a trajectory after ball hitting is hardly curved (easily straightened), and may indicate that a hit ball direction is hardly deviated relative to a target direction (target line). - For example, in a case where a position of the
head 3 a at halfway back is included in the region E, and a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down is included in the region A, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved, and thus thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively low score. Therefore, in the example illustrated inFIG. 25 , pv21 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points. - For example, in a case where a position of the
head 3 a at halfway back and a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down are all included in the region C, it is expected that a hit ball easily flies straight, and thus thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively high score (for example, 5 points maximum). Therefore, in the example illustrated inFIG. 25 , pv13 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points. - The
score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “rotation” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top and the face angle φ is included. Specifically, first, thescore calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range each of the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top and theface angle 4 included in data (target diagnosis input data) regarding a swing is included. Next, thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the rotation score table 343. - In the present embodiment, as illustrated in
FIG. 26 , the rotation score table 343 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top is included and a range in which the face angle φ is included. In the example illustrated inFIG. 26 , a range in which the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than θ1”, “θ1 or more and less than θ2”, “θ2 or more and less than θ3”, “θ3 or more and less than θ4”, and “θ4 or more”. A range in which theface angle 4 is included is classified into seven ranges such as “less than φ1”, “φ1 or more and less than φ2”, “φ2 or more and less than φ3”, “φ3 or more and less than φ4”, “φ4 or more and less than φ5”, “φ5 or more and less than φ6”, and “φ6 or more”. For example, in a case where the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top is included in the range of “less than θ1”, and the face angle φ is included in the range of “less than φ1”, a score is pr1. Each of scores pr1 to pr35 illustrated inFIG. 26 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points. - The
score calculation portion 311 may calculate a lower score as a hit ball predicted on the basis of a relationship between the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top and the face angle φ becomes more easily curved. - For example, since the face surface of the
golf club 3 is considerably open in a state where the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top is extremely large, it is expected that the face surface is not completely returned to a square at impact, and thus a hit ball is easily curved. A state in which the face angle φ is extremely large is a state in which the face surface at impact is considerably open, and a state in which the face angle φ is extremely small (a negative state in which an absolute value thereof is great) is a state in which the face surface at impact is considerably closed. In either state, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved. In other words, for example, in a case where the shaft axis rotation angle θtop is included in the range of “θ4 or more”, and the face angle φ is included in the range of “less than φ1” or “φ6 or more”, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved, and thus thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively low score. Therefore, in the example illustrated inFIG. 26 , pr29 or pr35 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points. - For example, if the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top is small, it is expected that the face surface is completely returned to the square at impact, and thus a hit ball easily flies straight. If the face angle φ is close to 0°, the face surface at impact is close to the square, and thus it is expected that a hit ball easily flies straight. In other words, in a case where the shaft axis rotation angle θtop is included in the range of “less than θ1”, and the face angle φ is included in the range of “φ3 or more and less than φ4”, it is expected that a hit ball easily flies straight, and thus the
score calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively high score (for example, 5 points maximum). Therefore, in the example illustrated inFIG. 26 , pr4 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points. - The
score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “impact” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the club path (incidence angle) ψ and the relative face angle η is included. Specifically, first, thescore calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range the club path (incidence angle) ψ included in data (target diagnosis input data) regarding a swing is included. Thescore calculation portion 311 calculates the relative face angle η by subtracting the club path (incidence angle) ψ from the face angle φ included in the data (diagnosis target input data) regarding the swing (refer toFIG. 18 ), and determines in which range the relative face angle η is included. Next, thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the impact score table 344. - In the present embodiment, as illustrated in
FIG. 27 , the impact score table 344 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the relative face angle η is included and a range in which the club path (incidence angle) ψ is included. In the example illustrated inFIG. 27 , a range in which the relative face angle η is included is classified into five ranges such as “η1 or more”, “less than η1 and η2 or more”, “less than η2 and η3 or more”, “less than η3 and η4 or more”, and “less than η4”. A range in which the club path (incidence angle) ψ is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than ψ1”, “ψ1 or more and less than ψ2”, “ψ2 or more and less than ψ3”, “ψ3 or more and less than ψ4”, and “ψ4 or more”. For example, in a case where the relative face angle η is included in the range of “η1 or more”, and the club path (incidence angle) ψ is included in the range of “less than ψ1”, a score is pi1. Each of scores pi1 to pi25 illustrated inFIG. 27 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points. - The
score calculation portion 311 may calculate a lower score as a hit ball predicted on the basis of the club path (incidence angle) ψ and the relative face angle η becomes more easily curved. - For example, a state in which the relative face angle η is extremely large is a state in which the face surface at impact is open, and a state in which the face angle φ is extremely small (a negative state in which an absolute value thereof is great) is a state in which the face surface at impact is considerably closed. In either state, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved. For example, in a state in which the club path (incidence angle) ψ is extremely large, a trajectory of the
head 3 a at impact becomes a considerably inside-out trajectory, and thus it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved. In a state in which the club path (incidence angle) ψ is extremely small (a negative state in which an absolute value thereof is great), a trajectory of thehead 3 a at impact becomes a considerably outside-in trajectory, and thus it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved. In other words, for example, in a case where the relative face angle η is included in the range of “η1 or more” or “less than η4”, and the club path (incidence angle) ψ is included in the range of “less than ψ1” or “ψ4 or more”, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved, and thus thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively low score. Therefore, in the example illustrated inFIG. 27 , pi1, pi5, pi21, and pi25 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points. - For example, in a case where the relative face angle η is close to 0°, and the club path (incidence angle) ψ is close to 0°, the face surface at impact is close to the square, and a trajectory of the
head 3 a at impact is nearly straight. Therefore, it is expected that a hit ball easily flies straight. In other words, in a case where the relative face angle η is included in the range of “less than η2 and η3 or more”, and the club path (incidence angle) ψ is included in the range of “ψ2 or more and less than ψ3”, it is expected that a hit ball easily flies straight, and thus thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively high score (for example, 5 points maximum). Therefore, in the example illustrated inFIG. 27 , pi13 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points. - The
score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “down blow” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the attack angle δ and the absolute face angle φ is included in a case where an iron is selected as thegolf club 3. Specifically, first, thescore calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range the attack angle δ illustrated inFIG. 21 is included. Thescore calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range the face angle φ illustrated inFIG. 18 is included. Next, thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the down blow score table 345 as illustrated inFIG. 28 . - In the present embodiment, as illustrated in
FIG. 28 , the down blow score table 345 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the attack angle δ is included and a range in which the absolute face angle φ is included. In the example illustrated inFIG. 28 , a range in which the attack angle δ is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than −δ1”, “−δ1 or more and less than −δ2”, “−δ2 or more and less than −δ3”, “−δ3 or more and less than 0”, and “+δ4 or more” (where δ1>δ2>δ3 and δ4≅0). A range in which the absolute face angle φ is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than −φ1”, “−φ1 or more and 0 or less”, “more than 0 and less than +φ1”, “+φ1 or more and less than +φ2”, and “+φ2 or more” (where φ1<φ2). For example, in a case where the attack angle δ is included in the range of “less than −δ1”, and the absolute face angle φ is included in the range of “less than −φ1”, a score is pd1. - Here, when a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the second sign (positive), scores Pd5, Pd10, Pd15, Pd20, and Pd25 may be the lowest score. In this case, an absolute value of the threshold value δ4 may be infinitely small (δ4≅0). As mentioned above, the second sign (positive) of the attack angle (first angle) δ at impact indicates an upper blow in which the lowest point of the
club head 3 a during a downswing occurs before the impact. In an iron club requiring a down blow, if it is determined that a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the second sign (positive), the lowest score may be calculated, and thus a swing may be evaluated to be bad. - Next, in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative), and a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the fourth sign (positive), if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is equal to or greater than the first threshold value φ2, scores Pd21 to Pd24 illustrated in
FIG. 28 satisfying this condition may be set to be low. As mentioned above, the first sign (negative) of the attack angle (first angle) δ at impact indicates a down blow in which the lowest point of theclub head 3 a during a downswing occurs after the impact. If the attack angle (first angle) δ is zero, a true level blow occurs, but a level blow may also be regarded to occur in a case where an absolute value of an attack angle having the first sign (negative) is small. Even in this case, in a case where it is determined that the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is equal to or more than the first threshold value φ2 indicating an excessively open state, a low score may be calculated, and thus a swing may be evaluated to be bad, even if the attack angle (first angle) δ indicates a down blow. - Next, in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative), if an absolute value of the attack angle (first angle) δ is smaller than a second threshold value δ2, and an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is smaller than the third threshold value φ1, scores Pd8, Pd9, Pd13 and Pd14 satisfying this condition may be set to be highest. The case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow or a level blow. For example, if an absolute value of the attack angle (first angle) δ is smaller than the second threshold value δ2, it is determined that the attack angle (first angle) δ is in an appropriate range. Similarly, if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is smaller than the third threshold value φ1, it is also determined that the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is in an appropriate range. In this case, the highest score may be calculated, and thus the swing may be evaluated to be good.
- Next, in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative), and a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the fourth sign (positive), if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is equal to or greater than the third threshold value φ1 and is smaller than the first threshold value φ2, scores Pd16 to Pd19 satisfying this condition may be set as low scores. The case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow or a level blow. The case where a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the fourth sign (positive) corresponds to the time at which the face surface is open. In this case, if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is equal to or greater than the third threshold value φ1 and is smaller than the first threshold value φ2, low scores are set. The scores Pd21 to Pd24 illustrated in
FIG. 28 may be the same as the scores Pd16 to Pd19 illustrated inFIG. 28 . - Next, in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative), and a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the third sign (negative), if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is equal to or greater than the third threshold value φ1, scores Pd1, Pd2, Pd3 and Pd4 illustrated in
FIG. 28 satisfying this condition may be set as intermediate scores higher than the low scores. The case where a sign of the first angle corresponding to an attack angle is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow or a level blow. The case where a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the third sign (negative) corresponds to the time at which a face angle of the head (ball hitting portion) 3 a with respect to a target hitting direction at impact indicates a closed state. In this case, even if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is equal to or greater than the third threshold value φ1, intermediate scores which are higher than the low scores are set. - Next, if an absolute value of the attack angle (first angle) δ is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value δ1 and is smaller than the second threshold value δ2 in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative), and if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is smaller than the third threshold value φ1 in a case where a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the third sign (negative), a score Pd7 illustrated in
FIG. 28 satisfying this condition is set as a score which is lower than the highest score and is higher than the intermediate score. The case where a sign of the first angle corresponding to an attack angle is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow. In this case, if an absolute value of the attack angle (first angle) δ is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value δ1 and is smaller than second threshold value δ2, it can be said that the attack angle (first angle) δ is in a range similar to an appropriate range. The case where a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the third sign (negative) corresponds to the time at which a face angle of the head (ball hitting portion) 3 a with respect to a target hitting direction at impact indicates a closed state. In this case, if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is smaller than the third threshold value φ1, a score which is lower than the highest score and is higher than the intermediate score is set. - Next, if an absolute value of the attack angle (first angle) δ is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value δ1 and is smaller than the second threshold value δ2 in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative), and if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is smaller than the third threshold value φ1 in a case where a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the fourth sign (positive), a score Pd12 illustrated in
FIG. 28 satisfying this condition is set as a score which is lower than the highest score and is higher than the intermediate score. The case where a sign of the first angle corresponding to an attack angle is the first sign (negative) indicates a case where a swing using an iron club is an appropriate down blow. In this case, if an absolute value of the attack angle (first angle) δ is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value δ1 and is smaller than second threshold value δ2, it can be said that the attack angle (first angle) δ is in a range similar to an appropriate range. On the other hand, the case where a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the fourth sign (positive) corresponds to the time at which a face angle of the head (ball hitting portion) 3 a with respect to a target hitting direction at impact indicates an open state. In this case, if an absolute value of the absolute face angle (second angle) δ is smaller than the third threshold value φ1, a score which is lower than the highest score and is higher than the intermediate score is set. - In the present embodiment, in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative), and a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the fourth sign (positive), a lower score may be calculated as an absolute value of the second angle becomes greater (for example, Pd6<Pd7<Pd8, Pd9, Pd11<Pd12<Pd13).
- In the present embodiment, in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative), a higher score may be calculated as an absolute value of the first angle becomes smaller and an absolute value of the second angle becomes smaller (for example, Pd2<Pd7=Pd12<Pd8=Pd13, and Pd7=Pd12>Pd17).
- In the present embodiment, in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative), and a sign of the absolute face angle (second angle) φ is the third sign (negative), a lower score is calculated as an absolute value of the second angle becomes greater (for example, Pd1<Pd6, Pd2<Pd7, Pd3<Pd8, and Pd4<Pd9).
- The
score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “upper blow” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the attack angle δ and the absolute face angle φ is included in a case where a driver (wood) is selected as thegolf club 3. Specifically, thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the upper blow score table 346, for example, as illustrated inFIG. 29 . - Here,
FIG. 29 may be created, for example, by changing signs of the attack angle (first angle) δ illustrated inFIG. 28 . In other words, since a driver (wood) requires an upper blow, if a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the first sign (negative) indicating a down blow, scores pu5, pu10, pu15, pu20 and pu25 satisfying this condition are the lowest score. Also in a case where a sign of the attack angle (first angle) δ is the second sign (positive) indicating an upper blow, if the absolute face angle (second angle) φ indicates an excessive open state (φ≧+φ2), scores pu21 to pu24 satisfying this condition are the lowest score. The scores pu1 to pu25 illustrated inFIG. 29 may be the same as the scores Pd1 to Pd25 illustrated inFIG. 28 in corresponding numbers. For example, inFIG. 29 , the highest score may be set in the range of 0≦δ≦δ2 and the range of −φ1<φ<+φ1 (pu8=pu9=pu13=pu14=highest score). InFIGS. 28 and 29 , values of δ1 to δ4 or values of φ1 and φ2 may be the same as or different from each other. InFIGS. 28 and 29 , values of Pd1 to Pd25 and values of Pu1 to Pu25 may be the same as or different from each other. - The
score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of the “swing efficiency” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges each of the grip deceleration ratio RV and the grip deceleration time ratio RT is included. Specifically, first, thescore calculation portion 311 determines whether or not in which range each of the grip deceleration ratio RV and the grip deceleration time ratio RT included in data (target diagnosis input data) regarding a swing is included. Next, thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to the swing efficiency score table 347. - In the present embodiment, as illustrated in
FIG. 30 , the swing efficiency score table 347 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the grip deceleration ratio RV is included and a range in which the grip deceleration time ratio RT is included. In the example illustrated inFIG. 30 , a range in which the grip deceleration ratio RV is included is classified into six ranges such as “nu1 or more”, “less than nu1 and nu2 or more”, “less than nu2 and nu3 or more”, “less than nu3 and nu4 or more”, “less than nu4 and nu5 or more”, and “less than nu5”. A range in which the grip deceleration time ratio RT is included is classified into six ranges such as “nup1 or more”, “less than nup1 and nup2 or more”, “less than nup2 and nup3 or more”, “less than nup3 and nup4 or more”, “less than nup4 and nup5 or more”, and “less than nup5”. For example, in a case where the grip deceleration ratio RV is included in the range of “nu1 or more”, and the grip deceleration time ratio RT is included in the range of “nup1 or more”, a score is ps1. Each of scores ps1 to ps36 illustrated inFIG. 30 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points. - The
score calculation portion 311 may calculate a higher score as swing efficiency predicted on the basis of the grip deceleration ratio RV and the grip deceleration time ratio RT becomes higher. - It is considered in a golf swing that, when the
head 3 a is accelerated, the arms are decelerated by reducing forces of the arms in a downswing, and thus natural rotation of the golf club occurs, so that the shaft is accelerated. A tendency for the natural rotation of the golf club to occur can be understood depending on to what extent a speed of the grip is decelerated during a downswing. Therefore, it is expected that a highly efficient swing using natural rotation of the golf club can be realized as the grip deceleration ratio RV becomes higher. However, if a timing at which natural rotation of the golf club occurs is close to an impact timing, that is, the grip deceleration time ratio RT is low, impact occurs in a state in which the natural rotation of the golf club cannot be sufficiently used, and thus it cannot necessarily be said that a highly efficient swing is performed. In other words, for example, in a case where the grip deceleration ratio RV is included in the range of “nu1 or more”, and the grip deceleration time ratio RT is included in the range of “nup1 or more”, it is expected that swing efficiency is high, and thus thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively high score. For example, in a case where the grip deceleration ratio RV is included in the range of “less than nu5”, and the grip deceleration time ratio RT is included in the range of “less than nup5”, it is expected that swing efficiency is low, and thus thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively low score. Therefore, in the example illustrated inFIG. 30 , ps1 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points, and ps36 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points. - The
score calculation portion 311 calculates a score of a “carry” item depending on in which range among a plurality of ranges a ball arrival point (carry) κ estimated on the basis of a relative face angle η and a head speed ν is included. Specifically, first, thescore calculation portion 311 determines in which range each of the relative face angle η and the ball arrival point (carry) κ included in data (diagnosis target input data) regarding a swing is included. Next, thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a score corresponding to a determination result by referring to a ball carry score table 350 illustrated inFIG. 31 . - In the present embodiment, as illustrated in
FIG. 31 , the ball carry score table 350 defines a score for each combination of a range in which the ball arrival point (carry) κ is included and a range in which the relative face angle η is included. In the example illustrated inFIG. 31 , a range in which the ball arrival point (carry) κ is included is classified into five ranges such as “less than κ1”, “κ1 or more and less than κ2”, “κ2 or more and less than κ3”, “κ3 or more and less than κ4”, and “κ4 or more”. A range in which the relative face angle η is included is classified into seven ranges such as “less than η1”, “η1 or more and less than η2”, “η2 or more and less than η3”, “η3 or more and less than η4”, “η4 or more and less than η5”, “η5 or more and less than η6”, and “η6 or more”. For example, in a case where the ball arrival point (carry) κ is included in the range of “less than κ1”, and the relative face angle κ is in the range of “less than η1”, a score is pk1. Each of scores pk1 to pk35 illustrated inFIG. 31 is any one of, for example, 1 point to 5 points. - The
score calculation portion 311 may calculate a lower score as a ball carry predicted on the basis of a relationship between the ball arrival point (carry) κ and the relative face angle η becomes shorter. For example, in a case where the ball arrival point (carry) κ is included in the range of “less than κ1”, and the relative face angle η is included in the range of “less than η1”, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved in a hooked state or a carry is reduced (a carry is short), or therelative face angle 1 is included in the range of “η6 or more”, it is expected that a hit ball is easily curved in a sliced state or a carry is reduced (a carry is short). Thus, thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively low score. Therefore, in the example illustrated inFIG. 31 , pk1 or pk6 may be 1 point which is the lowest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points. - For example, if the relative face angle η is close to 0°, it is expected that a hit ball easily flies straight and a carry is increased (a carry is long). In other words, for example, in a case where the relative face angle η is included in the range of “η3 to η4”, and the ball arrival point (carry) κ is included in the range of “κ4 or more”, it is expected that a hit ball easily flies straight, and a carry is also long, and thus the
score calculation portion 311 calculates a relatively high score (for example, 5 points maximum). Therefore, in the example illustrated inFIG. 31 , pk32 may be 5 points which is the highest score, for example, among 1 point to 5 points. - Here, in the score tables illustrated in
FIGS. 25 to 31 , a level is calculated on the basis of the first index and the second index. As mentioned above, a level can be calculated through positioning of a swing in a two-axis coordinate system formed of the first index and the second index, and thus a swing of a golf club (exercise appliance) at impact can be objectively determined. - A score is added to each region in advance on the basis of a relationship between the first index and the second index, and thus a lookup table can be used. A score can be specified on the basis of the first index and the second index by using the lookup table, and the score can be calculated as a level. As mentioned above, since a swing is calculated as a score on the basis of the first index and the second index by using the lookup table, it is possible to easily and appropriately perform an objective determination on a swing of a golf club (exercise appliance) at impact.
- The
score calculation portion 311 calculates a total score on the basis of the score of the “V zone” item, the score of the “rotation” item, the score of the “impact” item, the score of the “down blow”, the score of the “upper blow” item, the score of the “swing efficiency” item, and the score of the “carry” item. - For example, in a case where a score of each item is 5 points maximum, if a maximum of a total score is 100 points, the
score calculation portion 311 may multiply the score of each item by 4 so that 20 points maximum is obtained, and may add all the scores together so as to calculate a total score. In the swing diagnosis screen illustrated inFIG. 9 , a score of 5 points maximum of each item is displayed as a radar chart, and the score of each item is multiplied by 4, and 64 points obtained by adding all the scores together is a total score. - For example, the
score calculation portion 311 may increase a weight of a highly important item in diagnosis (evaluation) of a swing and may add scores of the items together so as to calculate a total score. -
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a process performed by theprocessing section 21 of theswing analysis apparatus 20 in relation to the swing diagnosis process.FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of the swing diagnosis process (swing diagnosis method) performed by theprocessing section 31 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30. The processing section 31 (an example of a computer) of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 performs the swing diagnosis process, for example, according to the procedures of the flowchart ofFIG. 33 by executing theswing diagnosis program 340 stored in thestorage section 34. Hereinafter, the flowcharts ofFIGS. 32 and 33 will be described. - First, the
processing section 21 of theswing analysis apparatus 20 transmits user identification information allocated to theuser 2, to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 (step S100 inFIG. 32 ). - Next, the
processing section 31 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the user identification information, and transmits list information of theswing analysis data 248 corresponding to the user identification information (step S200 inFIG. 33 ). - Next, the
processing section 21 of theswing analysis apparatus 20 receives the list information of theswing analysis data 248, and displays a selection screen (FIG. 7 ) of the swing analysis data on the display section 25 (step S110 inFIG. 32 ). - The
processing section 21 of theswing analysis apparatus 20 waits for theswing analysis data 248 to be selected on the selection screen of the swing analysis data (N in step S120 inFIG. 32 ), and transmits selected information of the swing analysis data to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 (step S130 inFIG. 32 ) if the information is selected (Y in step S120 inFIG. 32 ). - Next, the
processing section 31 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the selected information of the swing analysis data (step S210 inFIG. 33 ), and determines the sex (a male or a female) and the type of golf club (a driver or an iron) on the basis of theswing analysis data 248 which is selected on the basis of the selected information (step S220 inFIG. 33 ). - The
processing section 31 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 determines a region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back is included and a region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down is included on the basis of the selected swing analysis data 248 (step S230 inFIG. 33 ). - Next, the
processing section 31 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 transmits various pieces of information based on the selected swing analysis data (step S240 inFIG. 33 ). The various pieces of information based on the selectedswing analysis data 248 include the determination result in step S220, the determination result in step S230, and information regarding some index values (the face angle φ, the attack angle δ, the club path (incidence angle) ψ, the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top, the head speed, the grip deceleration ratio RV, and the grip deceleration time ratio RT) included in the selected swing analysis data. - Next, the
processing section 21 of theswing analysis apparatus 20 receives the various pieces of information based on the selectedswing analysis data 248, and displays an editing screen (FIG. 8 ) of input data on the display section 25 (step S140 inFIG. 32 ). - The
processing section 21 of theswing analysis apparatus 20 waits for a diagnosis starting operation to be performed on the editing screen of input data (N in step S150 inFIG. 32 ), and transmits diagnosis target input data to the swing diagnosis apparatus 30 (step S160 inFIG. 32 ) if the diagnosis starting operation is performed (Y in step S150 inFIG. 32 ). - Next, the
processing section 31 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 receives the diagnosis target input data (step S250 inFIG. 33 ), and calculates scores and a total score of a plurality of items on the basis of the diagnosis target input data (step S260 inFIG. 33 ). - Next, the
processing section 31 of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30 transmits (outputs) information regarding the scores and the total score of the plurality of items to the swing analysis apparatus 20 (step S270 inFIG. 33 ), and finishes the swing diagnosis process. - The
processing section 21 of theswing analysis apparatus 20 receives the information regarding the scores and the total score of the plurality of items, displays the swing diagnosis screen (FIG. 9 ) on the display section 25 (step S170 inFIG. 32 ), and finishes the process. - In the flowchart of
FIG. 32 , order of the respective steps may be changed as appropriate within an allowable range, some of the steps may be omitted or changed, and other steps may be added thereto. Similarly, in the flowchart ofFIG. 33 , order of the respective steps may be changed as appropriate within an allowable range, some of the steps may be omitted or changed, and other steps (for example, calculation of a score of the “carry” item) may be added thereto. -
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating examples of procedures of a process (step S260 inFIG. 33 ) of calculating scores and a total score of a plurality of items in the processing section 31 (score calculation portion 311) of theswing diagnosis apparatus 30. Hereinafter, the flowchart ofFIG. 34 will be described. - First, the
processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “V zone” item) corresponding to a region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway back is included and a region in which a position of thehead 3 a at halfway down is included by referring to the V zone score table 342 stored in the storage section 34 (step S261). - Next, the
processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “rotation” item) corresponding to the shaft axis rotation angle θtop at top and the face angle φ by referring to the rotation score table 343 stored in the storage section 34 (step S262). - Next, the
processing section 31 calculates the relative face angle η on the basis of the face angle φ and the club path (incidence angle) ψ (step S263). - Next, the
processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “impact” item) corresponding to the relative face angle η and the club path (incidence angle) ψ by referring to the impact score table 344 stored in the storage section 34 (step S264). - Next, if an iron is selected as the
golf club 3, theprocessing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “down blow” item) corresponding to the attack angle δ and the absolute face angle φ by referring to the down blow score table 345 stored in the storage section 34 (step S265). Alternatively, if a driver (wood) is selected as thegolf club 3, theprocessing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “upper blow” item) corresponding to the attack angle δ and the absolute face angle φ by referring to the upper blow score table 346 stored in the storage section 34 (step S265). - Next, the
processing section 31 calculates a score (a score of the “swing efficiency” item) corresponding to the grip deceleration ratio RV and the grip deceleration time ratio RT by referring to the swing efficiency score table 347 stored in the storage section 34 (step S266). - Finally, the
processing section 31 calculates a total score on the basis of the score of the “V zone” item calculated in step S261, the score of the “rotation” item calculated in step S262, the score of the “impact” item calculated in step S264, the score of the “down blow” or “upper blow” item calculated in step S265, and the score of the “swing efficiency” item calculated in step S266, or scores of the “ball curving” item and the “ball shooting direction” item (not illustrated) (step S267). - As described above, on the basis of the respective calculated scores (evaluation result), the image
data generation portion 212 performs a process of generating image data of the swing analysis data 248 (correlation data) as the first analysis information related to each index, and generating image data related to swing analysis data as the second analysis information for another user corresponding to an image (for example, a “ball arrival position”) displayed on thedisplay section 25. Thedisplay processing portion 214 displays various images (including text, symbols, and the like in addition to an image corresponding to the image data generated by the image data generation portion 212) on thedisplay section 25. - Regarding a specific display method on the
display section 25, for example,FIG. 35 in which a plurality of ball arrival positions are plotted is displayed in a two-axis coordinate system based on a correlation between a carry (yard: Y) expressed by a longitudinal axis as one axis and a width direction position in a fairway FW expressed by a transverse axis as the other axis. - Hereinafter, with reference to
FIGS. 35 to 41 , a description will be made of specific display examples of display methods displayed on thedisplay section 25.FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball arrival position as a display example 1.FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball a ball arrival distance and a target region as a display example 2.FIG. 37 is a histogram related to a “shooting direction” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position.FIG. 38 is a histogram related to “curving” as an example of analysis information for estimating an arrival position.FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining display examples illustrating a swing trajectory of a club head of a right-handed subject and a swing trajectory of a club head of a left-handed subject.FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a display example in which one of swing trajectories having mirror image shapes due to a difference between dominant hands of subjects is inverted to overlap the other which is not inverted.FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a ball arrival distance and a ball flight line (ball flight trajectory) as a display example 3. - First, with reference to
FIG. 35 , a description will be made of a display method in which the first region image AA (time-series image A1) is displayed on thedisplay section 25. - As illustrated in
FIG. 35 , thedisplay section 25 displays the time-series image A1 which is a region image indicating a set formed by plotting ball arrival positions (refer toFIG. 31 ) related to a plurality of swings, in a two-axis coordinate system in which one axis (longitudinal axis) expresses a ball carry (yard: Y) and the other axis (transverse axis) expresses, for example, a ball width direction position (arrival position) in a fairway FW. - Ball arrival positions which are estimated on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data obtained in a plurality of swings are displayed in this coordinate system as the time-series image A1 which is a single region image. The time-series image A1 is generated on the basis of the first analysis information including information related to at least one of a ball shooting direction, ball curving, and a head speed. Each ball shooting direction is generated as information such as
frequency distribution regions FIG. 37 , for example, in relation to a “club path (incidence angle)”. Each ball curving is generated as information such asfrequency distribution regions FIG. 38 , for example, in relation to a “relative face angle”. In the display examples illustrated inFIGS. 37 and 38 , for example, evaluation results based on score evaluation using the score table of the “carry” item illustrated inFIG. 31 are plotted. - The time-series image A1 indicates a set formed by plotting ball arrival positions related to a plurality of swings, that is, a variation range of arrival positions, and a center region P1 is displayed as position information of the center thereof. In the time-series image A1, a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line indicating a variation range of swing analysis data obtained by analyzing previously performed swings is displayed. In other words, the magnitude of an area of a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line indicating a variation range of the time-series image A1 corresponds to the magnitude of variations among a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and thus it can be said that a variation increases as the area of the region becomes larger.
- A message region entitled, for example, “you of the present” may be provided outside the coordinate system, and, a specific index value or additional information related to a ball arrival position of the
user 2 may be displayed therein. - There is a tendency that, in a golfer (user 2) having high skill, swing reproducibility is high, and a variation in each index is reduced when a plurality of swings are analyzed, but, on the other hand, in a golfer (user 2) having low skill, swing reproducibility is low, and a variation in each index is increased when a plurality of swings are analyzed.
- Therefore, if the display method shown in the display example 1 is used, the
user 2 can obtain visual information which can be visually recognized specifically and objectively, with respect to the present situation of ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings perform by the user. Consequently, theuser 2 can be conscious of and recognize the present ability (level) with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings. - Next, with reference to
FIG. 36 , a description will be made of a display method in which the first region image AA (time-series region images A1, A2 and A3) and target regions TA1 and TA2 are displayed on thedisplay section 25. - As illustrated in
FIG. 36 , thedisplay section 25 displays the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 which are three region images each indicating a set formed by plotting ball arrival positions (refer toFIG. 31 ) related to a plurality of swings, in a two-axis coordinate system in which one axis (longitudinal axis) expresses a ball carry (yard: Y) and the other axis (transverse axis) expresses, for example, a ball width direction position (arrival position) in a fairway FW. Center regions P1, P2 and P3 are also displayed in the respectively time-series images A1, A2 and A3. Thedisplay section 25 displays the two target regions TA1 and TA2 which theuser 2 aims and center regions TP1 and TP2. - Ball arrival positions which are estimated on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data obtained in a plurality of swings are displayed in this coordinate system as the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 which are three time-series region images. In the same manner as in the above-described display example 1, each of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 is generated on the basis of the first analysis information including information related to at least one of a ball shooting direction, ball curving, and a head speed. Each ball shooting direction is generated as information such as the
frequency distribution regions FIG. 37 , for example, in relation to a “club path (incidence angle)”. Each ball curving is generated as information such as thefrequency distribution regions FIG. 38 , for example, in relation to a “relative face angle”. - The time-series images A1, A2 and A3 indicate sets formed by classifying ball arrival positions (estimated values) related to a plurality of swings according to a predetermined period and plotting the ball arrival positions, that is, variation ranges of arrival positions, and the center regions P1, P2 and P3 are displayed as position information of the centers thereof. Specifically, the time-series image A1 is a set of data related to swings in a period, for example, from 15 days ago to 21 days ago, the time-series image A2 is a set of data related to swings in a period, for example, from 8 days ago to 14 days ago, and the time-series image A3 is a set of data related to swings in a period, for example, from the present to 7 days ago.
- In each of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3, a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line indicating a variation range of swing analysis data obtained by analyzing previously performed swings is displayed. In other words, the magnitude of an area of a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line indicating a variation range of each of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 corresponds to the magnitude of variations among a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, and thus a variation increases as the area of the region becomes larger. In the display example 2, among the time-series images A1, A2 and A3, a variation of the time-series image A3 can be said to be smallest.
- In a case where a ball arrival position at which the
user 2 aims is the target region TA1, whether or not theuser 2 reaches the target in a predetermined period can be determined by checking whether or not the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 come close to the target region TA1. For example, in the display example 2, the images come close to the time-series image A1 in an order of the time-series image A1 corresponding to the period from 15 days ago to 21 days ago, the time-series image A2 corresponding to the period from 8 days ago to 14 days ago, and the time-series image A3 corresponding to the period from the present to 7 days ago. In other words, it can be seen that the center region P1 of the time-series image A1, the center region P2 of the time-series image A2, and the center region P3 of the time-series image A3 come close to the center region TP1 of the target region TA1 in this order substantially along a target line TL connecting the center region P1 for theuser 2 to the center region TP1 of the target region TA1. As mentioned above, theuser 2 can understand that the user reaches the target for three weeks, that is, a skill thereof is improved. Even in a display aspect in which only the center regions P1, P2 and P3 are displayed without displaying the time-series images A1, A2 and A3, the same effect can be achieved. - The plurality of time-series images A1, A2 and A3 preferably have different display aspects. Specifically, regarding a plurality of time-series display aspects, the time-series image A1 is displayed with a solid line, the time-series image A2 is displayed with a dotted line (dashed line), and the time-series image A3 is displayed with a dot chain line, as different display aspects. As mentioned above, since the respective time-series images A1, A2 and A3 are displayed in different display aspects (for example, the types of lines, or colors) in the first region image AA, the
user 2 can easily identify at first sight a transition state from the past to the present with respect to the ability (level) related to a ball shooting direction in a plurality of swings. - A message region entitled, for example, “target setting” or “gap with you” may be provided outside the coordinate system, and a target value of the
user 2, and a specific record value or a target value related to a ball arrival position of theuser 2 may be displayed therein. Although not illustrated, a legend region (checkbox) may be provided, and, the display content for each display aspect may be written, such as a “set of analysis data in a period from the present to 7 days ago” and a “set of analysis data in a period from 8 days ago to 14 days ago” as an example of display of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3. - Therefore, if the display method shown in the display example 2 is used, the
user 2 can obtain visual information which can be visually recognized specifically and objectively, with respect to the present situation of ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings perform by the user, in addition to variations and a skill improvement state of the user. Consequently, theuser 2 can be conscious of and recognize the present ability (level) with respect to respective ball arrival positions corresponding to a plurality of swings. - The
user 2 has a dominant hand, and rotation directions in swing actions are opposite to each other, for example, in a golf swing due to a difference between dominant hands. Thus, in a case where pieces of motion analysis data for subjects having different dominant hands are compared with each other, rotation directions of swing trajectories are displayed to be opposite to each other, and thus the comparison cannot be performed through overlapping thereof. However, in a case where pieces of motion analysis data for subjects having different dominant hands are used for each other, this can be handled by performing a process of adding dominant hand information in advance and inverting an image as follows. -
FIG. 39 illustrates a display example in which a swing trajectory RS of thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 of a right-handed subject and a swing trajectory LS or thehead 3 a of thegolf club 3 of a left-handed subject are projected onto an X-Z plane of an absolute coordinate system ΣXYZ or are displayed in a three-dimensional manner so as to be viewed from the lateral side. InFIG. 39 , an intersection O between the X axis and the Y axis is located at the origin of the X axis, is an address position (impact position) of theclub head 3 a. It can be said that the swing trajectory RS and the swing trajectory LS have a relationship of mirror image inversion with respect to a reference plane including the Z axis passing through the origin O. - The swing trajectory RS and the swing trajectory LS have a relationship of a substantial mirror image with respect to the reference plane due to a difference between dominant hands of subjects, and it is possible to automatically determine whether a subject is right-handed or left-handed on the basis of an output from the
sensor unit 10. - Motion analysis information corresponding to one (for example, LS) of motions (RS, LS) forming a pair having mirror image shapes due to a difference between dominant hands of subjects, illustrated in
FIG. 39 , is calculated by the swing analysis portion 211 (refer toFIG. 10 ) on the basis of an output from thesensor unit 10, and is input to the image data generation portion 212 (refer toFIG. 10 ). The imagedata generation portion 212 may invert a sign (+ or −) of a value of one motion analysis information so that one (for example, LS) of the motions (RS, LS) forming a pair is displayed as an inverted image (/LS) as illustrated inFIG. 40 . - Consequently, as illustrated in
FIG. 40 , one (for example, LS) of the motions (RS, LS) forming a pair is inverted to be displayed on the side where the other (RS) of the motions (RS, LS) forming a pair is displayed. In other words, for example, an image of a motion for a left dominant hand is displayed in the same orientation as an image of a motion for a right dominant hand. Consequently, the motion for a left dominant hand and the motion for a right dominant hand can be easily compared with each other, and thus it becomes easier to perform motion analysis. - In a case where both of the motions (RS, LS) forming a pair are input, the
swing analysis portion 211 calculates motion analysis information by using an output from thesensor unit 10. The imagedata generation portion 212 may invert one (for example, LS) in the motion analysis information and may not invert the other (RS) so that an inverted image (for example, /LS) of one of the motions (RS, LS) forming a pair and a noninverted image (RS) of the other (for example, RS) are displayed on a screen in an overlapping manner as illustrated inFIG. 40 . - In the above-described way, a motion for a left dominant hand can be displayed to overlap a motion for a right dominant hand in the same orientation, and thus similarities and differences between both of the images can be clearly recognized so that swing analysis can be more easily performed.
- With reference to
FIG. 41 , a description will be made of a display method in which the time-series region images A1, A2 and A3, the target region TA1, a ball flight line (ball flight trajectory), and the second region image (an image related to an arrival position) BB for another user are displayed on thedisplay section 25. The display related to the display example 3 may be performed on the basis of the score table of the “carry” item illustrated inFIG. 31 in relation to the ball arrival point (carry) κ which is estimated on the basis of the relative face angle η, the head speed ν, and the like. - As illustrated in
FIG. 41 , in the same manner as in the display example 1, thedisplay section 25 is provided with a two-axis coordinate system in which one axis (longitudinal axis) expresses a ball carry (yard: Y) and the other axis (transverse axis) expresses, for example, a ball width direction position (yard: Y) in a fairway FW. A ball hitting point Q1, ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC1 and FC2, and the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 as three region images each indicating a distribution (variation) of ball arrival positions related to a plurality of swings are displayed in this coordinate system on thedisplay section 25. Thedisplay section 25 also displays the target region TA1 indicating an arrival position region at which theuser 2 aims. - The ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC1 and FC2 indicate ball movement trajectories from the ball hitting point Q1 to an arrival position, estimated on the basis of analysis results which are based on measured data of swings performed by the
user 2. For example, the ball flight line (ball flight trajectory) FC1 indicates that a ball flies in a sliced state, and reaches an arrival position, and the ball flight line (ball flight trajectory) FC2 indicates that a ball flies linearly (straight), and reaches an arrival position. Each of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 indicates a distribution (variation) of estimated ball arrival positions, and a set classified according to a time series is displayed as a region surrounded by an outer circumferential line. - Each of the plurality of time-series images A1, A2 and A3 corresponds to a variation between a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings according to the magnitude of an area of the region surrounded by the outer circumferential line. In this example, a large area of the region indicates that a variation is large. Such exemplary content is shown in a legend region (checkbox) 96
d 2. Variation extents of the plurality of time-series images A1, A2 and A3 may be displayed. InFIG. 41 , as written in the legend region (checkbox) 96d 2 in the display method of the modification example of the display example 3, the legends are written, such as “88.2”, and indicate the respective variation extents of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3. A variation is reduced, that is, an area of the region surrounded by the outer circumferential line becomes smaller as a value of the variation extent becomes greater (closer to 100). In another legend region (checkbox) 96d 1, a time-series condition for each of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 is written, and, for example, the time-series image A1 indicated with the solid line may indicate data in a period from the present to 7 days ago. - The second region image (an image related to an arrival position) BB corresponding to the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the
user 2 may also be displayed as a comparison target on thedisplay section 25. InFIG. 41 , the second region image BB which is, for example, a thick-color portion (inFIG. 41 , a dark black portion) on which data concentrates is displayed by shading of plots on the background of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3. - According to the display example 3 of the display method, the
user 2 can check a movement trajectory of a ball hit by the user through image display and can thus easily understand the movement trajectory. Since the target region TA1 indicating a target arrival position region is displayed in the coordinate system, theuser 2 can specifically and objectively recognize and check to what extent there is a gap between the ability (level) of the user and the target with respect to a ball arrival position, or to what extent the present ability (level) is improved with respect to the target in addition to a variation. - According to the display example 3, the first region image AA for the
user 2, and the second region image BB corresponding to the first region image AA in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from theuser 2, are displayed together in the coordinate system having two indexes as axes on thedisplay section 25. Consequently, theuser 2 can easily compare the first region image AA for theuser 2 with the second region image BB related to swings performed by another person, and can thus objectively perform evaluation. For example, if a user who is different from theuser 2 is set as a person who has to be a model, for example, a leader or a pro golfer, it is possible to objectively evaluate a difference between the ability of theuser 2 and the ability of the leader or the pro golfer. - The ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC1 and FC2 may also be displayed as images indicating regions for each time series or as regions indicating the variation extents. Region display here indicates that line segments (corresponding to the ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC1 and FC2 illustrated in
FIG. 41 ) indicating a plurality of ball flight trajectories related to a plurality of swings are displayed to overlap each other, and a set of the line segments indicating the ball flight trajectories is displayed. Through this display, it is possible to further check a variation in relation to the ball flight lines (ball flight trajectories) FC1 and FC2. - Next, with reference to
FIG. 42 , a description will be made of Modification Example 1 related to another display of an analysis result.FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating Modification Example 1 related to another display of an analysis result. - In Modification Example 1 related to another display of an analysis result, as illustrated in
FIG. 42 , for example, pieces of record data of pro golfers A, B and C who theuser 2 aims to become are displayed as regions. Time-series records are plotted from the previous record value P of theuser 2, and, thus, for example, a line segment L10 or L20 can be drawn. For example, in a case where theuser 2 aims to become the pro golfer C, if time-series plots are arranged as in the line segment L10, it can be seen that the user's attitude comes close to a target attitude. On the other hand, if time-series plots are arranged as in the line segment L20, it can be seen that the user's attitude becomes distant from the target attitude, that is, the user's attitude is not directed toward the target attitude. - As mentioned above, since the record value P indicating the ability (level) of the user, the target regions (for example, record data of the pro golfers A, B and C), and the record values which are plotted in a time series from the record value P are displayed, the
user 2 can visually understand whether or not the user is directed toward a target related to a swing at first sight. - The display of the target regions (for example, the record data of the pro golfers A, B and C) may be changed, for example, by tapping a position of a desired target region on a screen.
- Next, with reference to
FIG. 43 , a description will be made of a modification example of the display method described in the display example 3.FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating Modification Example 2 related to another display method of an analysis result, and, in the display method of Modification Example 2, a coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions by reference lines DL1 and DL2. The display method of the Modification Example 2 is the same as in the display example 3 except for the reference lines DL1 and DL2, and thus description thereof will be omitted. - In the display method of the Modification Example 2, the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions by the reference lines DL1 and DL2 provided along the longitudinal axis and the transverse axis. In Modification Example 2, the coordinate system is divided into four regions including a first quadrant Z1, a second quadrant Z2, a third quadrant Z3, and a fourth quadrant Z4 by reference lines DL1 and DL2. A proportion of plot points of the second region image BB occupying each of the separate four regions (the first quadrant Z1, the second quadrant Z2, the third quadrant Z3, and the fourth quadrant Z4) is displayed in a percentage (%) in a legend region (checkbox) 96
d 3. - According to this display, a proportion of the second region image BB which is included in each of the regions (the first quadrant Z1, the second quadrant Z2, the third quadrant Z3, and the fourth quadrant Z4) into which the coordinate system is divided, and which is related to estimation information obtained by estimating a ball arrival position corresponding to each of a plurality of swings performed by another user, that is, a proportion related to estimation information regarding a ball arrival position for each swing is displayed. Consequently, the
user 2 can understand a swing state of another person. Theuser 2 can objectively check biasing regarding ball arrival positions in a plurality of swings performed by the user while performing comparison with swings performed by another person. - The coordinate system may be divided into four regions such as the first quadrant Z1, the second quadrant Z2, the third quadrant Z3, and the fourth quadrant Z4 by the reference lines DL1 and DL2, and a proportion of plot points of the time-series images A1, A2 and A3 (first analysis information) which are analysis data for the
user 2 in each of the regions (the first quadrant Z1, the second quadrant Z2, the third quadrant Z3, and the fourth quadrant Z4) may be displayed in a percentage (%) in the legend region (checkbox) 96d 3. - In the embodiment, the
swing analysis portion 211 detects impact by using the square root of the square sum as shown in Equation (2) as a combined value of three-axis angular velocities measured by the sensor unit, but, as a combined value of three-axis angular velocities, for example, a square sum of three-axis angular velocities, a sum or an average of three-axis angular velocities, or the product of three-axis angular velocities may be used. Instead of a combined value of three-axis angular velocities, a combined value of three-axis accelerations such as a square sum or a square root of three-axis accelerations, a sum or an average value of three-axis accelerations, or the product of three-axis accelerations may be used. - In the embodiment, the
score calculation portion 311 may calculate scores and a total score of a plurality of items on the basis of the selectedswing analysis data 248 without displaying the input data editing screen as illustrated inFIG. 8 . Thescore calculation portion 311 may calculate scores and a total score of a plurality of items on the basis of input data (for example, all indexes are manually input data) in which all values of indexes indicating features of a swing are pseudo-values. - In the embodiment, the
score calculation portion 311 calculates scores of seven items including the “V zone” item, the “rotation” item, the “impact” item, the “down blow” or “upper blow” item, the “efficiency (swing efficiency)” item, the “head speed” item, and the “hands-up” item, but may not calculate scores of some of the items, and may calculate scores of other items. In the present embodiment, thescore calculation portion 311 calculates a total score, but may not calculate a total score. Other items such as the “head speed” item, and the “hands-up” item may be added to five items including the “V zone” item, the “rotation” item, the “impact” item, the “down blow” or “upper blow” item, and the “swing efficiency (efficiency)”, and information related to at least one of the items may be included. - In the embodiment, the
score calculation portion 311 calculates scores of a plurality of items by using various score tables, but may use equations instead of the score tables. - In the embodiment, the
score calculation portion 311 may also function as theswing analysis portion 211, and may perform a swing diagnosis process (a swing analysis process and a score calculation process) including the swing analysis process on the basis of measured data (an output signal from an inertial sensor) from thesensor unit 10, which is data regarding a swing. - In the above-described embodiment, the concept of the V zone (a region interposed between the shaft plane and the Hogan plane) is introduced in order to define the regions A, B, C, D and E in which the
head 3 a is included. The V zone is a region interposed between the first virtual plane along the longitudinal direction of thegolf club 3 and the second virtual plane passing through the vicinity of the shoulder of the user 2 (refer toFIG. 44A ). The first virtual plane is, for example, a so-called shaft plane specified by a first axis along a target hit ball direction and a second axis along the longitudinal direction of thegolf club 3 before a swing is started. The second virtual plane is, for example, a so-called Hogan plane which includes the first axis, and forms a predetermined angle with the first virtual plane. However, the second virtual plane may be a virtual plane (including both of a virtual plane parallel to the first virtual plane and a virtual plane along the first virtual plane) which is parallel to the first virtual plane. A parallel virtual plane may be referred to as a “shoulder plane” (refer toFIG. 44B ). In the above-described embodiment, the second virtual plane may be calculated on the basis of both of the first virtual plane and thephysical information 244 of theuser 2, and a plane having a predetermined relationship with the first virtual plane may be the second virtual plane. - A method of defining the first virtual plane and the second virtual plane is not limited thereto, and, for example, virtual planes as illustrated in
FIG. 44C may be used. Two virtual planes illustrated inFIG. 44C are virtual planes which are set on the basis of an attitude of the shaft before a swing is started, in which a first plane is a virtual plane passing through the vicinity of the elbow of theuser 2, and a second plane is a virtual plane passing through the vicinity of the knee of the user. The first virtual plane and the second virtual plane are not parallel to each other, and intersect each other on a straight line extending in a grip end direction of thegolf club 3, for example. - As described above, comments on diagnosis information based on the first region image AA or a practice method based on the diagnosis information may be displayed along with the first region image AA or the second region image BB displayed as an image on the
display section 25. Since the comments on the diagnosis information or the practice method based on the diagnosis information are displayed, theuser 2 can easily understand a swing state, and can thus take appropriate measures to improve a swing or perform efficient practice. - Next, with reference to
FIGS. 45 and 46 , a modification example of the motion analysis system will be described.FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a motion analysis system related to a modification example, andFIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of a sensor unit and a swing analysis apparatus related to the modification example. - A
swing diagnosis system 1000 as a motion analysis system related to the modification example is configured to include a sensor unit (an example of an inertial sensor) 10, auser terminal 320, acustomer terminal 350, and aserver 300 as illustrated inFIGS. 45 and 46 . Above all, theuser terminal 320, thecustomer terminal 350, and theserver 300 are connected to thenetwork 40 such as the Internet, and can transmit and receive information to and from each other. A use example of thesensor unit 10 is the same as in the above-described embodiment, and flows of information transmitted and received among thesensor unit 10, theuser terminal 320, theserver 300, and thecustomer terminal 350 are the same as illustrated inFIG. 45 . - A user of the
sensor unit 10 is, for example, a purchaser of thesensor unit 10. Thesensor unit 10 is attached to, for example, thegolf club 3 owned by the user, and is used for a golf swing practice of the user. An operator of theuser terminal 320 is the same as the user. Theuser terminal 320 is used for the user to operate thesensor unit 10 or to access theserver 300. - A manager of the
customer terminal 350 is a golf goods manufacturer or a golf goods shop dealing in various types of golf clubs (examples of exercise appliances). The manufacturer or the shop is a customer to a manager of the server 300 (hereinafter, referred to as a “customer” as appropriate). A user visits the manufacturer or the shop in order to purchase a golf club. - An operator of the
customer terminal 350 is an employee of a customer (the manufacturer or the shop). In the present modification example, the employee is a person (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “fitter”) who allows a user visiting the manufacturer or the shop to try to hit a ball, so as to find a golf club fitted to the user, and prompts the user to purchase the golf club. - The manager of the
server 300 is, for example, a person who made a promise to provide a program or various pieces of information for controlling thesensor unit 10 to theuser terminal 320 in advance. The manager of theserver 300 is also a person who made a promise to provide information to each of a plurality of customers including the customer (that is, the manufacturer or the shop) of the present modification example. - A user (not illustrated) attaches the
sensor unit 10 to thegolf club 3 owned by the user, and inputs physical information of the user, information regarding the golf club (golf club information), sensor attachment position information, and the like to theuser terminal 320. The physical information includes, for example, a height of the user, a length of the arms, a length of the legs, the sex, and other information. The golf club information includes, for example, information regarding a manufacturer name of thegolf club 3, a product number, a club number, a club type (a head type and a shaft type), a specification (a length of the shaft, a position of the centroid thereof, a lie angle, a face age, a loft angle, and the like). - Next, the user performs a measurement starting operation (an operation for causing the
sensor unit 10 to start measurement) via theuser terminal 320. Next, after receiving a notification (for example, a notification using a voice) of giving an instruction for taking an address attitude (a basic attitude before starting a swing) from theuser terminal 320, the user takes an address attitude so that the axis in the longitudinal direction of the shaft of thegolf club 3 is perpendicular to a target line (target hit ball direction), and stands still. The attitude of the user illustrated inFIG. 2 is the address attitude. - Next, the use receives a notification (for example, a notification using a voice) of permitting a swing from the
user terminal 320, and then hits thegolf ball 4 by performing a swing action. - If the user performs the measurement starting operation, the
user terminal 320 transmits a measurement starting command to thesensor unit 10, and thesensor unit 10 starts measurement of three-axis accelerations and three-axis angular velocities and sequentially transmits the measured data to theuser terminal 320. Then, theuser terminal 320 analyzes the swing action on the basis of the received measured so as to generate swing analysis data, and transmits the swing analysis data to theserver 300. - The swing action performed by the user includes an action reaching impact (ball hitting) at which the
golf ball 4 is hit through respective states of halfway back at which the shaft of thegolf club 3 becomes horizontal during a backswing after starting a swing (backswing), a top at which the swing changes from the backswing to a downswing, and halfway down at which the shaft of thegolf club 3 becomes horizontal during the downswing. For example, a swing time point (date and time), user identification information (user ID), the sex of the user, the golf club information, the physical information of the user, and the sensor attachment position information are added to the swing analysis data which is transmitted from theuser terminal 320 to theserver 300. - Here, in a case where a carry is not increased even if the user of the present modification example uses the golf club, the user visits the shop or the manufacturer who is an owner of the
customer terminal 350 in order to examine purchase of a new golf club. - The fitter accesses the
server 300 by operating thecustomer terminal 350, and calls a home screen (an input screen of the user ID) which is displayed on thecustomer terminal 350. - Next, the fitter prompts the user to input the user ID of the user visiting the shop or the manufacturer to the
customer terminal 350. - If the user ID is input to the
customer terminal 350, the user ID and a customer ID are transmitted from thecustomer terminal 350 to theserver 300. Here, a case is assumed in which thecustomer terminal 350 stores the customer ID in advance. In a case where the customer is not stored, the fitter may input the customer ID to thecustomer terminal 350. The fitter may input the user ID to thecustomer terminal 350 instead of the user. - Thereafter, a diagnosis result is transmitted from the
server 300 to thecustomer terminal 350, and is displayed on thecustomer terminal 350. The diagnosis result in the present modification example includes a recommended golf club type (recommended club type) which is recommended to the user by the shop or the manufacturer. The recommended club type is expressed by, for example, a combination of a recommended shaft type and a recommended head type. - Next, the fitter checks the recommended club type displayed on the
customer terminal 350, and picks up one or a plurality of golf clubs included in the recommended club type among a plurality of golf clubs stored in the shop or the manufacturer to which the fitter belongs. - Next, the fitter allows the user to actually try to hit a ball (swing) with one or a plurality of golf clubs having been picked up, and thus determines whether or not the picked-up golf club is fitted to the user.
- If the fitter determines that the picked-up golf club is not fitted to the user, the fitter picks up another golf club type stored in the shop or the manufacturer, and allows the user to try to hit a ball with the golf club. The fitter repeatedly performs this, and thus searches for a golf club fitted to the user.
- If a golf club type fitted to the user is found, the user purchases the fitted golf club type.
- If the user purchases the golf club, the fitter inputs the club type of purchased golf club (purchased club type) to the
customer terminal 350. The input of fitting data performed by the fitter is performed, for example, by selecting (touching or clicking) a region in which the purchase d club type is included. - As a result, fitting data indicating the recommended club type and the purchased club type is transmitted from the
customer terminal 350 to theserver 300. - In a case where a difference between the recommended club type and the purchased club type is small, the accuracy of swing diagnosis in the
server 300 may be regarded to be high (the recommended club type is fitted to the user), and, in a case where a difference between the recommended club type and the purchased club type is great, the accuracy of swing diagnosis in theserver 300 may be regarded to be low (the recommended club type is not fitted to the user). - Therefore, in the present modification example, the fitting data transmitted to the
server 300 is used for correction (feedback correction) of a diagnosis table (an example of a diagnosis reference) in theserver 300. The diagnosis table which is a target of the feedback correction is a diagnosis table dedicated to the customer (the shop or the manufacturer) of the present modification example. - Therefore, in the present modification example, as the number of times of the fitter using the
swing diagnosis system 1000 is increased, the diagnosis table (an example of a customer diagnosis reference) dedicated to the customer (the shop or the manufacturer) is optimized (customized), and thus the accuracy of swing diagnosis is improved. In other words, a probability that a recommended club type may be fitted to a user is improved. - If the accuracy of swing diagnosis is improved, the fitter belonging to the shop or the manufacturer, even a beginner, can reduce the time required to find a golf club fitted to a user (the time required for fitting). In this case, the time required for a user to purchase a golf club is also reduced.
- Even if the fitter is inexperienced, the fitter performs fitting with confidence on the basis of a recommended club type supported by the
swing diagnosis system 1000, and can thus give a user a sense of security. - Here, as the fitting data, a “combination of the recommended club type and the purchased club type” is used, but, at least one of “review of a fitter”, “pointing-out by a fitter”, “improvements from a fitter”, and the like may be used instead of the “purchased club type” or along with “purchased club type”.
- If the user ID and the customer ID are received from the
customer terminal 350, theserver 300 acquires a diagnosis result (recommended club type) for the user and dedicated to the customer on the basis of the swing analysis data of the user and the diagnosis table of the customer stored in theserver 300 in advance, and transmits the diagnosis result to thecustomer terminal 350. - If the fitting data (a combination of the recommended club type and the purchased club type) is received from the
customer terminal 350, theserver 300 performs feedback correction on the diagnosis table of the customer so that a difference between the recommended club type and the purchased club type is reduced. - The
server 300 adjusts the intensity of the feedback correction (whether or not the feedback is performed, a shift amount of a boundary position, a timing of the feedback reference numeral, and the like) according to the reliability of the received fitting data. - The
server 300 estimates the reliability of the received fitting data on the basis of the fitting data of the customer or the swing analysis data of the user. - As mentioned above, the
swing diagnosis system 1000 may be formed of a manager of the server, a golf goods manufacturer or a golf goods shop which is a customer, and a user visiting the golf goods shop in order to purchase a golf club. - Next, with reference to
FIG. 47 , a description will be made of an example of using a head mounted display (HMD) as theswing analysis apparatus 20.FIG. 47 is a perspective view illustrating an example of a head mounted display (HMD) as a motion analysis apparatus. - As illustrated in
FIG. 47 , a head mounted display (HMD) 500 includes a spectaclemain body 501 mounted on the head of theuser 2. The spectaclemain body 501 is provided with adisplay section 502. Thedisplay section 502 integrates a light beam emitted from animage display unit 503 with a light beam directed toward the eyes of theuser 2, and thus overlaps a virtual image on theimage display unit 503 with a real image of the external world viewed from theuser 2. - The
display section 502 is provided with, for example, theimage display unit 503 such as an liquid crystal display (LCD), afirst beam splitter 504, asecond beam splitter 505, a firstconcave reflection mirror 506, a secondconcave reflection mirror 507, ashutter 508, and aconvex lens 509. - The
first beam splitter 504 is disposed on the front side of the left eye of theuser 2, and partially transmits and partially reflects light emitted from theimage display unit 503. Thesecond beam splitter 505 is disposed on the front side of the right eye of theuser 2, and partially transmits and partially reflects light which is partially transmitted from thefirst beam splitter 504. - The first
concave reflection mirror 506, which is disposed in front of thefirst beam splitter 504, partially reflects the partially reflected light from thefirst beam splitter 504 so as to transmit the light through thefirst beam splitter 504, and thus guides the light to the left eye of theuser 2. The secondconcave reflection mirror 507, which is disposed in front of thesecond beam splitter 505, partially reflects the partially reflected light from thesecond beam splitter 505 so as to transmit the light through thesecond beam splitter 505, and thus guides the light to the right eye of theuser 2. - The
convex lens 509 guides partially transmitted light from thesecond beam splitter 505 to the outside of the head mounted display (HMD) 500 when theshutter 508 is opened. - The analysis information (refer to
FIGS. 35 to 43 ) in a series of swing actions of theuser 2, the swing information such as a swing trajectory (not illustrated) approximating the swing actions, and the like, as described in the display examples, are displayed on the head mounted display (HMD) 500. The display content is the same as in the above-described display examples, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. - According to the head mounted display (HMD) 500, since the head mounted display (HMD) is mounted on the head and displays information, the
user 2 can understand swing information of the user or attitude (position) information of thehands 2 a without holding the swing analysis apparatus (motion analysis apparatus) 20 including thedisplay section 25 displaying information with the hands. - The head mounted display (HMD) 500 may have the functions of the
swing analysis apparatus 20 and may display swing analysis or swing information based on measured data from thesensor unit 10, and may be used as a display section displaying image data transmitted from the separateswing analysis apparatus 20. The functions of the swing analysis apparatus (motion analysis apparatus) 20 include the processing section 21 (an example of a processing section), thecommunication section 22, theoperation section 23, thestorage section 24, thedisplay section 25, and thesound output section 26 as described above. - Next, with reference to
FIG. 48 , a description will be made of an example of using an arm mounted analysis display apparatus as an example of a wearable apparatus, as the motion analysis display apparatus.FIG. 48 is a perspective view illustrating an arm mounted motion analysis display apparatus as an example of a wearable apparatus. - As illustrated in
FIG. 48 , a wearable (arm mounted) analysis display apparatus 600 is mounted on a predetermined part (the wrist in this example) of the user (subject) 2 (refer toFIG. 2 ) and displays swing analysis or swing information based on measured data from the sensor unit 10 (refer toFIG. 2 ). The analysis display apparatus 600 includes an apparatusmain body 610 which is worn by theuser 2 and displays swing analysis information such as swing analysis or attitude information of thehands 2 a (refer toFIG. 2 ) of theuser 2, and aband portion 615 which is attached to the apparatusmain body 610 and allows the apparatusmain body 610 to be mounted on theuser 2. - The apparatus
main body 610 of the analysis display apparatus 600 is provided with abottom case 613 on the side mounted on theuser 2, and atop case 611 on an opposite side to the side mounted on theuser 2. Abezel 618 is provided on a top side (top case 611) of the apparatusmain body 610, and aglass plate 619 as a top plate portion (outer wall) which is disposed inside thebezel 618 and protects inner structures is also provided. A pair ofband attachment portions 617 which is a connection portion with theband portion 615 are provided on both sides of thebottom case 613. - The apparatus
main body 610 is provided with a display portion such as a liquid crystal display (LCD 634) directly under theglass plate 619. Theuser 2 can view swing analysis information, attitude information of thehands 2 a of theuser 2, or the like, displayed on the liquid crystal display (LCD 634) via theglass plate 619. The apparatusmain body 610 may include theprocessing section 21, thecommunication section 22, theoperation section 23, thestorage section 24, thedisplay section 25, and thesound output section 26 in the same manner as theswing analysis apparatus 20 described with reference toFIG. 10 . Thedisplay section 25 corresponds to a display portion such as the liquid crystal display (LCD 634) in this example. - The analysis information (refer to
FIGS. 35 to 43 ) in a series of swing actions of theuser 2, the swing information such as a swing trajectory (not illustrated) approximating the swing actions, and the like, as described in the display examples, are displayed on the display portion of the liquid crystal, display (LCD 634). The display (presentation) content is the same as in the above-described display examples, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. - Other advice information based on swing analysis results, for example, a text image representing a swing type of the
user 2 or a text image representing advice (practice method or the like) suitable for the swing type of theuser 2 may be displayed on the display portion of the liquid crystal display (LCD 634). Moving images as video pictures may be displayed on the display portion of the liquid crystal display (LCD 634). - In the above description, an example in which the top plate portion of the apparatus
main body 610 is implemented by theglass plate 619 has been described, but the top plate portion may be formed by using materials other than glass, such as transparent plastic, as long as a member is transparent so as to allow the LCD 634 to be viewed, and has the rigidity of being capable of protecting constituent elements included in thetop case 611 and thebottom case 613, such as the LCD 634. A configuration example in which thebezel 618 is provided has been described, but thebezel 618 may not be provided. - According to the wearable (arm mounted) analysis display apparatus 600, since analysis display apparatus is mounted on the arm and displays information, the
user 2 can understand swing information of the user or attitude (position) information of thehands 2 a without holding the display portion (liquid crystal display (LCD 634)) displaying information with the hands. - The wearable (arm mounted) analysis display apparatus 600 may have the functions of the
swing analysis apparatus 20 and may display swing analysis or swing information based measured data from thesensor unit 10, and may be used as a display section displaying image data transmitted from the separateswing analysis apparatus 20. The functions of the swing analysis apparatus (motion analysis apparatus) 20 include the processing section 21 (an example of a processing section), thecommunication section 22, theoperation section 23, thestorage section 24, thedisplay section 25, and thesound output section 26, as described in theswing analysis apparatus 20 of the above-described embodiment. - For example, the invention includes substantially the same configuration (for example, a configuration in which functions, methods, and results are the same, or a configuration in which objects and effects are the same) as the configuration described in the embodiment. The invention includes a configuration in which an inessential part of the configuration described in the embodiment is replaced with another part. The invention includes a configuration which achieves the same operation and effect or a configuration capable of achieving the same object as in the configuration described in the embodiment. The invention includes a configuration in which a well-known technique is added to the configuration described in the embodiment.
- The entire disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-081825 filed Apr. 15, 2016 is expressly incorporated by reference herein.
Claims (19)
1. A display method comprising:
generating first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user;
estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and
displaying a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
2. The display method according to claim 1 ,
wherein the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
3. The display method according to claim 1 ,
wherein a predetermined target region is displayed in the coordinate system.
4. The display method according to claim 1 ,
wherein the first region image includes a plurality of time-series images, and
wherein the plurality of time-series images are displayed in the coordinate system.
5. The display method according to claim 4 ,
wherein a display aspect differs for the time-series images.
6. The display method according to claim 1 ,
wherein an area of the first region image is the magnitude corresponding to variations between the plurality of pieces of data related to the plurality of swings.
7. The display method according to claim 1 ,
wherein a second region image corresponding to the first region image in relation to a plurality of swings performed by another user who is different from the user is displayed in the coordinate system along with the first region image.
8. The display method according to claim 7 ,
wherein the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and
wherein a proportion of the second region image occupying the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
9. The display method according to claim 7 ,
wherein the coordinate system is divided into a plurality of regions, and
wherein a proportion of the first region image occupying the plurality of separate regions is displayed.
10. The display method according to claim 1 ,
wherein a ball flight trajectory from a ball shooting position to an arrival position is displayed in the coordinate system.
11. The display method according to claim 1 ,
wherein the first analysis information includes information related to at least one of impact, a V zone, efficiency, rotation, a head speed, hands-up, and a down blow.
12. The display method according to claim 1 ,
wherein diagnosis information is displayed on the basis of the first region image.
13. The display method according to claim 12 ,
wherein a practice method is displayed on the basis of the diagnosis information.
14. A swing analysis apparatus comprising:
an analysis section that generates first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user;
a processing section that estimates respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and
a display section that displays a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
15. The swing analysis apparatus according to claim 14 ,
wherein the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
16. A swing analysis system comprising:
the swing analysis apparatus according to claim 14 ; and
an inertial sensor.
17. A swing analysis system comprising:
the swing analysis apparatus according to claim 15 ; and
an inertial sensor.
18. A recording medium storing a program causing a computer to execute:
generating first analysis information on the basis of a plurality of pieces of data related to a plurality of swings, output from an inertial sensor which is attached to a user or an exercise appliance swung by the user and measures the plurality of swings performed by the user;
estimating respective ball arrival positions corresponding to the plurality of swings on the basis of the first analysis information; and
displaying a first region image in a coordinate system having at least two indexes as axes on the basis of the respective ball arrival positions.
19. The recording medium according to claim 17 ,
wherein the two indexes are a carry and a relative face angle.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2016-081825 | 2016-04-15 | ||
JP2016081825A JP2017189491A (en) | 2016-04-15 | 2016-04-15 | Display method, swing analysis device, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20170296870A1 true US20170296870A1 (en) | 2017-10-19 |
Family
ID=60039365
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/478,649 Abandoned US20170296870A1 (en) | 2016-04-15 | 2017-04-04 | Display method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20170296870A1 (en) |
JP (1) | JP2017189491A (en) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20170203151A1 (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Electronic apparatus, system, presentation method, presentation program, and recording medium |
US20170203211A1 (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Motion analysis method, motion analysis program, storage medium thereof, motion analysis apparatus, and motion analysis system |
Families Citing this family (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP6421858B1 (en) * | 2017-09-29 | 2018-11-14 | サミー株式会社 | Game machine |
JP6421857B1 (en) * | 2017-09-29 | 2018-11-14 | サミー株式会社 | Game machine |
Citations (14)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20050272516A1 (en) * | 2004-06-07 | 2005-12-08 | William Gobush | Launch monitor |
US20060029916A1 (en) * | 2001-08-01 | 2006-02-09 | Boogie Boscha | Golf putter for, system and method of training a golf player |
US20060166737A1 (en) * | 2005-01-26 | 2006-07-27 | Bentley Kinetics, Inc. | Method and system for athletic motion analysis and instruction |
US20070298896A1 (en) * | 2006-06-21 | 2007-12-27 | Nusbaum Mark E | Electronically controlled golf swing analyzing/training mat system with ball striking-related feedback |
US20120052972A1 (en) * | 2010-08-26 | 2012-03-01 | Michael Bentley | Wireless golf club motion capture apparatus |
US20130029791A1 (en) * | 2011-07-27 | 2013-01-31 | Leland Stanford Jr. University | Methods for analyzing and providing feedback for improved power generation in a golf swing |
US20130102419A1 (en) * | 2011-10-25 | 2013-04-25 | Ai Golf, LLC | Method and system to analyze sports motions using motion sensors of a mobile device |
US20160335911A1 (en) * | 2014-03-27 | 2016-11-17 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Golf club determination method, golf club determination device, and golf club determination program |
US20160365000A1 (en) * | 2015-06-10 | 2016-12-15 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Exercise instruction system, instruction content generation method, exercise instruction device, and instruction content generation device |
US20170120124A1 (en) * | 2015-11-04 | 2017-05-04 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis method, swing analysis program, recording medium, and swing display apparatus |
US20170189756A1 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2017-07-06 | IAM Sports & Entertainment | Creating Personalized Athletic-Performance Models |
US20170189757A1 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2017-07-06 | IAM Sports & Entertainment | Monitoring Performance and Generating Feedback with Athletic-Performance Models |
US20170203187A1 (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Presentation method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium |
US20170252607A1 (en) * | 2016-03-03 | 2017-09-07 | Blast Motion Inc. | Aiming feedback system with inertial sensors |
Family Cites Families (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH05317480A (en) * | 1992-05-25 | 1993-12-03 | L Ee C:Kk | Diagnostic device for golf practice |
JPH0639069A (en) * | 1992-07-20 | 1994-02-15 | Miyamae:Kk | Image display method for golf training machine |
JP2004135908A (en) * | 2002-10-18 | 2004-05-13 | Bridgestone Sports Co Ltd | Performance measuring instrument and method for golf club |
US7536033B2 (en) * | 2006-03-03 | 2009-05-19 | Richard Albert Kirby | Portable swing analyzer |
JP5574609B2 (en) * | 2008-03-19 | 2014-08-20 | カーステン マニュファクチュアリング コーポレーション | Method, apparatus and system for custom fitting of a golf club |
JP6146943B2 (en) * | 2010-06-08 | 2017-06-14 | ダンロップスポーツ株式会社 | Golf club fitting method, apparatus and analysis method thereof |
JP5761961B2 (en) * | 2010-11-02 | 2015-08-12 | ダンロップスポーツ株式会社 | Golf club fitting method, apparatus and analysis method thereof |
JP6467766B2 (en) * | 2013-06-21 | 2019-02-13 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Motion analysis method, motion analysis apparatus, and motion analysis program |
JP2014036903A (en) * | 2013-11-28 | 2014-02-27 | Maruman & Co Ltd | Golf shot diagnostic device |
JP2016030123A (en) * | 2014-07-30 | 2016-03-07 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Motion analysis method, motion analysis device, and program |
-
2016
- 2016-04-15 JP JP2016081825A patent/JP2017189491A/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2017
- 2017-04-04 US US15/478,649 patent/US20170296870A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (15)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20060029916A1 (en) * | 2001-08-01 | 2006-02-09 | Boogie Boscha | Golf putter for, system and method of training a golf player |
US20050272516A1 (en) * | 2004-06-07 | 2005-12-08 | William Gobush | Launch monitor |
US20060166737A1 (en) * | 2005-01-26 | 2006-07-27 | Bentley Kinetics, Inc. | Method and system for athletic motion analysis and instruction |
US20070298896A1 (en) * | 2006-06-21 | 2007-12-27 | Nusbaum Mark E | Electronically controlled golf swing analyzing/training mat system with ball striking-related feedback |
US20120052972A1 (en) * | 2010-08-26 | 2012-03-01 | Michael Bentley | Wireless golf club motion capture apparatus |
US20130029791A1 (en) * | 2011-07-27 | 2013-01-31 | Leland Stanford Jr. University | Methods for analyzing and providing feedback for improved power generation in a golf swing |
US20130102419A1 (en) * | 2011-10-25 | 2013-04-25 | Ai Golf, LLC | Method and system to analyze sports motions using motion sensors of a mobile device |
US9895590B2 (en) * | 2011-10-25 | 2018-02-20 | Aquimo, Llc | Method and system to analyze sports motions using motion sensors of a mobile device |
US20160335911A1 (en) * | 2014-03-27 | 2016-11-17 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Golf club determination method, golf club determination device, and golf club determination program |
US20160365000A1 (en) * | 2015-06-10 | 2016-12-15 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Exercise instruction system, instruction content generation method, exercise instruction device, and instruction content generation device |
US20170120124A1 (en) * | 2015-11-04 | 2017-05-04 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis method, swing analysis program, recording medium, and swing display apparatus |
US20170189756A1 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2017-07-06 | IAM Sports & Entertainment | Creating Personalized Athletic-Performance Models |
US20170189757A1 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2017-07-06 | IAM Sports & Entertainment | Monitoring Performance and Generating Feedback with Athletic-Performance Models |
US20170203187A1 (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Presentation method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium |
US20170252607A1 (en) * | 2016-03-03 | 2017-09-07 | Blast Motion Inc. | Aiming feedback system with inertial sensors |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20170203151A1 (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Electronic apparatus, system, presentation method, presentation program, and recording medium |
US20170203211A1 (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2017-07-20 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Motion analysis method, motion analysis program, storage medium thereof, motion analysis apparatus, and motion analysis system |
US10300332B2 (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2019-05-28 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Electronic apparatus, system, presentation method, presentation program, and recording medium |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP2017189491A (en) | 2017-10-19 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20170296869A1 (en) | Display method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium | |
US20170296871A1 (en) | Display method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium | |
US20170203172A1 (en) | Equipment display method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium | |
US10286282B2 (en) | Swing diagnosis method, recording medium, swing diagnosis apparatus, and swing diagnosis system | |
US20170028282A1 (en) | Swing diagnosis method, recording medium, swing diagnosis apparatus, and swing diagnosis system | |
US9962591B2 (en) | Motion analysis method, program, and motion analysis device | |
US10512833B2 (en) | Presentation method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium | |
US10307656B2 (en) | Swing diagnosis apparatus, swing diagnosis system, swing diagnosis method, and recording medium | |
US20170296870A1 (en) | Display method, swing analysis apparatus, swing analysis system, swing analysis program, and recording medium | |
US20170028283A1 (en) | Swing diagnosis apparatus, swing diagnosis system, swing diagnosis method, and recording medium | |
US20170203153A1 (en) | Electronic apparatus, system, determination method, determination program, and recording medium | |
US20170120122A1 (en) | Electronic apparatus, system, method, program, and recording medium | |
US20170203211A1 (en) | Motion analysis method, motion analysis program, storage medium thereof, motion analysis apparatus, and motion analysis system | |
US20170028253A1 (en) | Calculation apparatus, calculation system, calculation method, and recording medium | |
JP2016116719A (en) | Motion analysis device, motion analysis system, motion analysis method, and program | |
US20170239520A1 (en) | Motion analysis apparatus, motion analysis system, motion analysis method, recording medium, and display method | |
US10286285B2 (en) | Display method, display apparatus, motion analysis system, motion analysis program, and recording medium | |
US10252136B2 (en) | Swing diagnosis apparatus, swing diagnosis system, swing diagnosis method, and recording medium | |
US20170203188A1 (en) | Display method, motion analysis apparatus, motion analysis system, motion analysis program, and recording medium | |
US20170024610A1 (en) | Motion analysis apparatus, motion analysis system, motion analysis method, and display method and program of motion analysis information | |
US20170011652A1 (en) | Motion analysis method, motion analysis apparatus, motion analysis system, and program | |
US20160175647A1 (en) | Exercise analysis device, exercise analysis system, exercise analysis method, display device, and recording medium | |
US10300332B2 (en) | Electronic apparatus, system, presentation method, presentation program, and recording medium | |
US20170203186A1 (en) | Electronic apparatus, system, presentation method, presentation program, and recording medium | |
JP2016116745A (en) | Tilt determination device, tilt determination system, tilt determination method and program |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION, JAPAN Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:KIRYU, AKIRA;KODAIRA, KENYA;ITO, TSUYOSHI;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20170307 TO 20170309;REEL/FRAME:041846/0185 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |